Home

Ford 2008 Taurus Automobile User Manual

1. e F Series Crew Cab 4 b b 4 H 4 4 4 8 a 4 9 4 L 8 b Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor Once the child safety seat has been installed using the safety belt you can attach the top tether strap 215 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Tether strap attachment 1 Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat For vehicles with adjustable head restraints route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts other wise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback If the top of the safety seat hits the head restraint raise the head restraint to let the child seat fit further rearward 2 Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position 3 You may need to pull the seatback forward to access the tether anchors Make sure the seat is locked in the upright position before installing the child seat Refer to the Rear folding seat system with load floor section in this chapter for information on how to operate the rear seats 4 Remove tether cover 5 Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown e Front seats Regular Cab
2. 2 Remove the jumper cable on the negative connection of the booster vehicle s battery 346 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 3 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 4 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the disabled vehicle s battery After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions 347 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WRECKER TOWING If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional towing service or if you are a member of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider It is recommended that the vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed equipment Do not tow with a slingbelt Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure On 4x2 vehicles it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground and the rear wheels off the ground using a wheel lift On 4x4 vehicles it is recommended that your vehicle be towed using flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground However a wheel lift may be used to lift the rear of the vehicle so long as depending on vehicle con
3. e MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension and all folders containing MP3 files from F001 folder T001 track to F253 T255 Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation through the disc files 47 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Sample MP3 structure If you are burning your own MP3 discs it is important to understand 0 how the system will read the structures you create While various W7 4 mp3 O files may be present files with L mp3 extensions other than mp3 only files with the mp3 extension will be played Other files will be ignored y y Jm 3 by the system This enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety fi mps of tasks on your work computer J1 mp3 home computer and your in vehicle system LFT _9 mp3 L mp3 LP doc El ppt Z xls In track mode the system will display and play the structure as if it were only one level deep all mp3 files will be played regardless of being in a specific folder In folder mode the system will only play the mp3 files in the current folder Satellite radio information if equipped Satellite radio channels SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music news sports weather traffic and entertainment sa
4. 405 manual operation 288 TUYTSIBNAL ys deessectsapndesiscesacceeceeess 94 U Upfitter controls 0 eee 121 USB POLU niire na 44 Vv Vehicle Identification Number CVIIND x cciscescencspsacseceesvastetsctentneoars 410 Vehicle loading perecer 255 Ventilating your vehicle 277 WwW Warning lights see Lights 14 Washer fluid sreseioiconisiaa 372 Water Driving through 310 Windows DOWED carai 108 Windshield washer fluid and WIDETS esre ERE 103 checking and adding fluid 372 replacing wiper blades 373 Wrecker towing seesiccsseiinrs 348 419
5. Overdrive 4 45 mph 72 km h 16 mph 26 km h 35 mph 56 km h 12 mph 19 km h 20 mph 82 km h 8 mph 13 km h 5 mph 8 km h 2 mph 8 km h 1 Use 2H or 4H for 4WD equipped vehicles 2 Downshift at lower speeds when driving on slippery surfaces Reverse 1 Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift into R Reverse Failure to do so may damage the transmission 2 Move the gearshift lever into the neutral position and wait at least three seconds before shifting into R Reverse e The gearshift lever can only be moved into R Reverse by moving it from left of 3 Third and 4 Fourth before shifting into R Reverse This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from accidentally being shifted into R Reverse from D Overdrive Parking your vehicle 1 Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position 2 Fully apply the parking brake then shift into 1 First 3 Turn the ignition off WARNING Do not park your vehicle in Neutral it may move unexpectedly and injure someone Use 1 First gear and set the parking brake fully 290 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Reverse Sensing System RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when the R Reverse is selected and the vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph 5 km h The system is not effective at speeds
6. 2 Attach the strap hook onto the loop behind an adjacent seating position 3 Install the child safety seat tightly using the vehicle belts Follow the instructions in this chapter 4 Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions A single loop can be used to route and anchor more than one child seat For example the center loop can be used as a routing loop for a child safety seat in the center rear seat and as an anchoring loop for child seats installed in the outboard rear seats 218 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Child booster seats The belt positioning booster booster seat is used to improve the fit of the vehicle safety belt Children outgrow a typical child seat e g convertible or toddler seat when they weigh about 40 lb 18 kg and are around four 4 years of age Consult your child safety seat owner guide for the weight height and age limits specific to your child safety seat Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child remains appropriate for their weight height and age AND if properly secured to the vehicle Although the lap shoulder belt will provide some protection children who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap shoulder belts to fit properly and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt could increase the risk of serious injury i
7. 6 4 4 Disconnect the electrical B connector by squeezing the release tab and pushing the connector i EA forward and then pulling it 2 rearward 5 Remove the bulb assembly by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out WARNING Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children s reach Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated Install the new bulb s in reverse order 97 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Lights Replacing park turn and sidemarker lamp bulbs aerodynamic 1 Make sure that the headlamps are off and open the hood 2 Remove the four bolts from the top side and bottom front of the headlamp assembly 3 Pull the assembly straight out 4 Remove the bulb assembly 1 sidemarker or 2 park turn by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out 5 Pull the old bulb out from the socket Install the new bulb s in reverse order Replacing headlamp bulbs sealed beam 1 Make sure that the headlamps are off and open the hood 98 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing U
8. is displayed 10 100 Note To change oil life 100 miles value from 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months to another value proceed to Step 3 3 Once OIL LIFE SET TO XXX is displayed release and press the RESET control switch to change the Oil Life Start Value Each release and press will reduce the value by 10 141 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls Units English Metric 1 Select this function from the SETUP menu for the current units UNITS to be displayed lt ENG gt fiETRIC 2 Press the RESET button to change from English to Metric Autolamp This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the ignition is switched off 1 To disable enable the autolamp delay feature select this function T 7 from the SETUP menu for the AUT oae SEC current display mode lt 0 gt 10 20 2 Press the RESET control to select the new Autolamp delay values of 0 10 20 30 60 90 120 or 180 seconds Autolock This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is shifted into any gear putting the vehicle in motion 1 To disable enable the autolock feature select this function from the T 1Z SETUP menu for the current display RUT OLOLA mode lt ON gt OFF 2 Press the RESET control to turn the autolock ON or OFF Compass display if equipped The compass heading is displayed as one of N NE E SE
9. Low fluid level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is at the bottom of the dipstick and the ambient temperature is above 50 F 10 C Correct fluid level The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 150 F 170 F 66 C 77 C on a level surface The normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles 30 km of driving You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is above 50 F 10 C However if fluid is added at this time an overfill condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating temperature The transmission fluid should be in this range if at normal operating temperature 150 F 170 F 66 C 77 C The transmission fluid should be in this range if at ambient temperature 50 F 95 F 10 C 35 C 398 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications High fluid level Fluid levels above the safe range 4 may result in transmission failure An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels Before adding any fluid make sure the correct type is used The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick handle and also in the Maintenance Product Specifications and Capacities
10. Replacement keys If your keys are lost or stolen and you don t have an extra coded key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed Replacing coded keys can be very costly Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys 168 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Locks and Security Programming spare keys A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle Only SecuriLock keys can be used To program a coded key yourself you will need two previously programmed coded keys Keys that already operate your vehicle s engine and the new unprogrammed key s readily accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure If two previously programmed coded keys are not available you must bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare coded key s programmed Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin 1 Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition from the 1 off position to the 3 on position maintain ignition in the 3 on position for at least one second but no more than 10 seconds 2 Turn ignition from the 3 on position back to t
11. Tire Replacement Requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability WARNING Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information is not found on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure If you have questions regarding tire replacement contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 234 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING When mounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated re lub
12. e CATEGORY Press OK to enter category mode Press A IV to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Press OK when the desired category appears in the display After a category is selected press SEEK to search for that specific category of channels only i e ROCK You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels Press OK to close and return to the main menu e SAVE SONG Press OK to save the currently playing song title in the system s memory If you try to save something other than a song CANT SAVE will appear in the display When the chosen song is playing on any satellite radio channel the system will alert you with an audible prompt Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song You can save up to 20 song titles If you attempt to save a song when the system is full the display will read REPLACE SONG Press OK to access the saved songs and press A IV to cycle through the saved songs When the song appears in the display that you would like to replace press OK SONG REPLACED will appear in the display 29 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems e DELETE SONG Press OK to delete a song title from the system s memory Press amp IV to cycle through the saved songs When the song title appears in the display that you would like
13. 2 Apply the brake Use a tool or a a small screwdriver to pry out the gt D WARNING Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer as soon as possible 285 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving Understanding the shift positions of the 5 speed automatic transmission PRND321 This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and shift quality When the vehicle s battery has been disconnected for any type of service or repair the transmission will need to relearn the normal shift strategy parameters much like having to reset your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been disconnected The Adaptive Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating parameters This learning process could take several transmission upshifts and downshifts during this learning process slightly firmer shifts may occur After this learning process normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume P Park This p
14. 2 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure 3 Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap 5 Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare Note Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tire wheel information section for description Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 15 bar For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tire wheel information section for description Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label 6 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 7 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges 230 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Tire inflation information All tires with Steel Carcass Plies if equipped This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewalls As such they cannot be treated like normal light truck tires Tire service including adjusting tire pressure must be performed by personnel
15. Engine Coolant Do Not Open When Hot Avoid Smoking Flames or Sparks Explosive Gas Power Steering Fluid Service Engine Soon Passenger Compartment Air Filter Check Fuel Cap ABA 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Power Window Lockout Interior Luggage Compartment Release Engine Oil Engine Coolant Temperature Battery Battery Acid Fan Warning Maintain Correct Fluid Level Engine Air Filter Jack Low Tire Pressure Warning TH 85 D gt L ir Ge B west Vv C 13 Instrument Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission SELECT RESET 14 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Harley Davidson vehicles APRND321 Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause expensive repairs A warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle s functions Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the bulbs work If any light remains on after starting the vehicle refer to the respective system warning light description for additional information Note Some warning lights are reconfigurable telltale RTT indicator lights and will illuminate in the Message Center Display and function the same as the warning light Service engin
16. If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 318 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Sa a gt af lal 3 S eo ro es fo N o NI vi 0 i i ini f iol oy oj N es 19 o D 7 aa Cio C13 Ci6_ iS e Joo foo foo a o Be SE a 5 C27 28 Q The fuses are coded as follows Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits ee er el ee Pot BOA Notused spare 3 15A Family Entertainment System FES ee m ae Not used spare Keypad illumination Brake Shift Interlock BSI SPBJB PT 20A Turn signals O Po 7 OA Left headlamp Low beam 8 l0A Right headlamp Low beam 15A Interior lighting Lighted running boards 319 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating 10 Cargo lamp Puddle lamp Switch backlight pf a Not used spare uH 7 5A Power mirror switch Driver 21 15A Fog lamp relay feed Cornering lamps Park lamp relay feed High beam headlight relay feed Horn relay feed 25 10A Power telescoping mirror switch Demand lamps underhood and illuminated visor battery saver 27 20A Ignition switch feed Passenger compartment fuses 28 42 43 44 and 45 Engine compartment starter relay coil 57 Diesel engine Accessory shutoff
17. Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Use the same filling rate setting dow medium high each time the tank is filled e Allow no more than two automatic click offs when filling e Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating e Use a known quality gasoline preferably a national brand e Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the same direction each time you fill up e Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent Calculating fuel economy 1 Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading in miles or kilometers 2 Each time you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added Gn gallons or liters 3 After at least three to five tank fill ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading 5 Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy Calculation 1 Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used Calculation 2 Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by total kilometers traveled Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving city or highway This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle s fuel economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer a
18. To decrease increase the brightness level on the display screen press the brightness control on the DVD system A display will appear at the bottom of the screen indicating the brightness level The brightness display will only appear when the menu is not displayed 55 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems DVD player controls wow rerun wena if Hos FOS a UWA 1 Headphone control A B Press to select either the A or B headphone source Then press MEDIA to select the desired playing media for that headset When a headphone channel has been selected A or B selections will affect the source on that channel only Note Headphone A can access any possible media AM FM1 FM2 SAT Gf equipped CD DVD DVD AUX Headphone B can only access DVD and DVD AUX For further information refer to Single play Dual play later in this section 2 BF A Stop Bject Press Cu once to stop and press a second time to eject a disc from the DVD system 3 F A Reverse Press and release for the previous chapter or track Press and hold to reverse search a DVD Video CD or FES CD in DVD CD mode 56 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 4 gt Fast forward Press and gt release for the next chapter or track Press and hol
19. 3 MENU Press repeatedly to access to the following settings Setting the clock Press until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS is displayed Press A IV lt q SEEK P to adjust the hours minutes SATELLITE RADIO MENU if equipped Press MENU when satellite radio mode is active to access Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu Press A IV to cycle through the following options e CATEGORY Press OK to enter category mode Press A IV to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Press OK when the desired category appears in the display After a category is selected press SEEK to search for that specific category of channels only i e ROCK You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels Press OK to close and return to the main menu e SAVE SONG Press OK to save the currently playing song title in the system s memory If you try to save something other than a song CANT SAVE will appear in the display When the chosen song is playing on any satellite radio channel the system will alert you with an audible prompt Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song You can save up to 20 song titles If you attempt to save a song when the system is full the display will read REPLACE SONG Press OK to access the saved songs and press A V to cycle through the saved songs When the song appea
20. Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire XX OIL LIFE CHANGE SOON Gas engine only Displayed when an oil change will soon be required and shows the percentage of oil life left OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Gas engine only Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0 the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message will be displayed OIL LIFE OK displays after you have changed the oil 149 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls TAILGATE LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a n tailgate lock designed to help i prevent theft of the tailgate e Insert ignition key and turn to the Sy right to engage lock e Turn ignition key to the left to unlock Tailgate removal Your tailgate is removable to allow more room for loading Note If equipped with a Reverse Camera System RCS do steps 1 through 3 before removing the tailgate 1 Before removal of the tailgate locate and disconnect the tailgate in line connector under the pickup box on the passenger side of the vehicle near the spare tire 2 Install a protective cap located in the glove box onto the in line RCS connector that remains under the pickup box 3 Partially lower tailgate and carefully feed tailgate harness up through the gap between the pickup box and
21. align the cap properly and reinstall it 386 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications If you must replace the fuel filler cap replace it with a fuel filler cap that is designed for your vehicle The vehicle warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap Otherwise fuel may spray out and injure you or others WARNING If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision which may result in possible personal injury bp Choosing the right fuel Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 10 ethanol Do not use fuel ethanol E85 diesel methanol leaded fuel or any other fuel The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds including manganese based additives Note Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause powertrain damage a loss of vehicle performance and repairs may not be covered under warranty 387 2009 F 250 350 450 550
22. e SATI SAT2 or SATS Satellite Radio mode if equipped e LINE IN Auxiliary input jack In AM FM1 or FM2 mode Press pd SEEK gt to select preset stations within the selected radio band or press and hold to select the next previous radio frequency In Satellite radio mode if equipped e Press jad SEEK P to advance through preset channels or subscribed channels In CD mode e Press kid SEEK Pe to select the next selection on the CD or press and hold to forward or reverse the CD In any mode e Press VOL or to adjust volume 119 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls Navigation system hands free control features if equipped Press and hold VOICE briefly until the voice t icon appears on the Navigation display to use the voice command feature Press VOICE to complete a voice command For further information on the Navigation system refer to the Navigation System supplement SYNC system hands free control feature if equipped Press VOICE briefly until the voice t icon appears on the display to use the voice command feature You will hear a tone and LISTENING will appear in the radio display Press and hold VOICE to exit voice command Press to activate phone mode or answer a phone call Press and hold to end call or exit phone mode Press lt lt p gt P to scroll through various menus and selections Pres
23. e although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat s whenever possible children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat s of the vehicle or the child has a medical condition which according to the child s physician makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child s condition 3 Medical condition A passenger has a medical condition which according to his or her physician e causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger and e makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and allowing the passenger even if belted to hit the dashboard or windshield in a crash WARNING This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the driver and right front passenger These particular belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the risk of injury in a collision The energy management safety belt is designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce concentration of force on an occupant s chest and reduce the risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs In a crash if the airbag is turned OFF this energy management safety belt might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a serious or fatal injury The more severe t
24. gt will scroll through all tracks on the disc In Folder mode pressing lt SEEK SEEK gt will scroll only through tracks within the selected folder Press lt q FOLDER FOLDER gt to access the previous next folder if available COMPRESS Compression Available only in CD MP3 mode Press MENU until COMPRESS ON OFF appears in the display Use W lt SEEK SEEK to toggle ON OFF When COMPRESS is ON the system will bring the soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level 4 AUX Press repeatedly to cycle through FES DVD if equipped oA LINE IN auxiliary audio mode if equipped and SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 modes satellite radio if equipped For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode refer to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 31 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 5 SEEK In radio mode press lt q gt to access the el previous next strong station In CD MP3 mode press lt lt gt to access the previous next CD MP3 track In satellite radio mode if equipped press lt SEEK SEEK P to seek to the previous next channel If a specific category is selected Jazz Rock News etc press lt q SEEK SEEK B gt to seek to the previous next channel in the sele
25. lever completely 6 If the trailer wheels lock up indicated by squealing tires reduce the GAIN setting if the trailer wheels turn freely increase the GAIN setting Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below trailer wheel lock up If towing a heavier trailer trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10 Explanation of instrument cluster warning messages The TBC interacts with the instrument cluster message center to display the following messages TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT This message is displayed and accompanied by a single chime in response to faults sensed by the TBC In the event this message is seen please contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair The TBC may still function but performance may be degraded WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER This message is displayed when a Short circuit on the electric brake output wire has occurred If the WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER message is displayed and accompanied by a single chime with no trailer connected the problem is with the vehicle wiring from the TBC to the 7 pin connector in the bumper If the message is only displayed with a trailer connected the problem is related to the trailer wiring consult your trailer dealer for assistance This can be a short to ground i e chaffed wire or a short to voltage i e pulled pin on trailer emergency break away battery or trailer brakes drawing
26. s rear end to the right Sharp steering movements may cause the trailer to jackknife or go out of control 271 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Tires e All trailer tires should be of the same size and construction e Select tires that meet the trailer loading requirements e Always check tow vehicle and trailer tire pressure before towing Launching or retrieving a boat Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed from the water When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval e do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper e do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches 15 cm above the bottom edge of the rear bumper Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components e causing internal damage to the components e affecting driveability emissions and reliability Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in water Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair required RECREATIONAL TOWING Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational RV towing An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmissio
27. suoyes 0 0E 16 TL suoT es 0 6T quUawMajaddang IPIND SAOUMQ PSNI OQANJ UOYJILUJ JIOBAUT AYOAIG LONO ALAIT Y9 PUD 0 9 07 JoJoy epeuep TO IoJoW WMTWeIg Jadng OGMG AVS Ye1o10 0 SM TO 1010W puotg ZIdST OZMS OXO UAS unuq SM dS 02MS OX OZ MG AVS Ieso1010 qUawMa addngs IPIND S 4aUMNg jase OQANJ UOYIALUT JIOAUT AYOAIG LINO AAIVT v9 PUD 0 9 YY OF JOJoy pa 10 oo moTaA quUR OOD susug Ploy eo 12 WNW IJLIDI0J OW JIEN UOLIA IdV pue V 0S6OZW SSM peuep 199 s tenb 0 4 TV ISEL6NW SSM TL94 Maintenance and Specifications Auo qeo srsseyo exe Jy Jue PNA xoq Suo yue pny xoq Joys JULI pony qe sisseyp uo Teuondo yueg drys py Yue fon oulsue aserp BUL Ieqy s pnpoun po susug SOUSU seS OTA 18 9 pue 8A Tr g suey IOM s pnpoun po susug UISU J S P yuejooo pony pue susug ouIsue OTA T9 9 Juejood sulsuy UOTIVITFIVedS pIo 406 Owners Guide 2nd Printing 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 USA fus Maintenance and Specifications AT eNOOUdIN NIO OT LX O O00GDCW SSM SO SINGLX A eNOOddN WO S LX V L6GOTN CSM M T DX 10 D T DX OuUON TTX d 60 TIN dsal SIX 10 P DX UOTIVITFIVeds pIo Jequinu 1ed pIo esueyo uow ALV AT eNOOUdIN Joy 970W COTTUS PMH JJeIdIOJONW sS pnpur T991 uorssrusueg orewomy syrenb G LT PA UOTSSTUSULIJ enuen 199 syrenb g g OTOUJUAS TM Ye1O1OJON pM S JaJsuel 1e1d10 O pm
28. too much current 268 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note Your TBC can be diagnosed by your authorized dealer to determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred however if the fault is with the trailer this diagnosis is not covered under your Ford warranty Points to Remember Remember to adjust gain setting before using the TBC for the first time Readjust GAIN setting on the TBC according to procedure above whenever road weather and trailer or vehicle loading conditions change from those that existed when the gain was initially set The sliding lever on the TBC should be used only for manual activation of trailer brakes to assist with proper adjustment of the GAIN Misuse such as application during trailer sway could cause instability of trailer and or tow vehicle Avoid towing in adverse weather conditions The TBC does not provide anti lock control of the trailer wheels Trailer wheels can lock up on slippery surfaces resulting in reduced stability of trailer and tow vehicle The TBC interacts with the brake system of the vehicle including ABS in order to reduce the likelihood of trailer wheel lockup Therefore if these systems are not functioning properly the TBC may not function at full performance When the vehicle is turned off the TBC Output is disabled and the display is shut down Reactivation of the ignition from OFF to ON will awaken t
29. turn the hub locks completely counterclockwise AWD system indicator lights The 4WD system indicator lights illuminate only under the following conditions If these lights illuminate when driving in 2WD contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible e 4x4 HIGH momentarily 4x4 illuminates after the engine is started Illuminates when 4H 4x4 HIGH High is engaged Flashes when shifting into or out of 4H 4x4 high CESOF systems only e 4x4 LOW momentarily 4x4 illuminates when the ignition is turned to the ON position LOW Illuminates when 4L 4x4 Low is engaged Flashes when shifting into or out of 4L 4x4 Low or if the range shift conditions are not met ESOF systems only Using a Manual Shift On Stop MSOS 4x4 system if equipped Note High shift efforts may be encountered when attempting to shift into and out of 4x4 modes It is recommended to allow the vehicle to roll at a speed below 5 mph 8 km h when shifting Note Some noise may be heard as the 4x4 system shifts or engages This is normal In order to reduce engagement noise it is recommended that all shifts be performed at speeds below 5 mph 8 km h 297 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving 2H 2WD For general on road driving Sends power to the rear wheels only 4H 4x4 High For winter and off road conditions Sends power to front and rear wheels This mode is not intended for use on dry pav
30. 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button note Step 2 in the Programming section while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until the frequency signal has been accepted by the HomeLink The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink accepts the radio frequency signal Proceed with Step 3 in the Programming section Operating the HomeLink Wireless Control System To operate simply press and release the appropriate HomeLink button 4 Activation will now occur for the trained product garage door gate operator security system entry door lock or home or office lighting etc For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Erasing HomeLink buttons To erase the three programmed buttons individual buttons cannot ey be erased e Press and hold the two outer O HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Release both buttons Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds V HomeLink is now in the train or learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 1 in the Programming section Reprogramming a single HomeLink butto
31. 216 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e Front seat SuperCab e Rear seats Crew Cab If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision 6 Refer to the Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts section of this chapter for further instructions to secure the child safety seat 7 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases Tether strap attachment rear SuperCab only There are three loops of webbing just above the back of the rear seat along the bottom edge of the rear window in the SuperCab These loops are to be used as both routing loops and anchor loops for up to three child safety seat tether straps These straps may be secured below the back of the seat with rubber bands To access reach below the back of the seat and pull tether loop out of the rubber band securing it 217 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to the loop directly behind the child seat To provide a tight tether strap 1 Route the tether strap through the loop directly behind the child seat
32. 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving SNOWPLOWING Ford recommends that the Super Duty F Series used for snow removal include the Snow Plow Package Option Installing the snowplow Weight limits and guidelines for selecting and installing the snowplow can be found in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book Snowplow section found at www fleet ford com truckbbas A typical installation affects the following e Certification to government safety laws such as occupant protection and airbag deployment braking and lighting Look for an Alterer s Label on the vehicle from the snowplow installer certifying that the installation meets all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS The Total Accessory Reserve Capacity TARC is shown on the lower right side of the vehicle s Safety Compliance Certification Label This applies to Ford completed vehicles of 10 000 Ib 4 536 kg GVWR or less This is the weight of permanently attached auxiliary equipment such as snowplow frame mounting hardware that can be added to the vehicle and satisfy Ford compliance certification to FMVSS Exceeding this weight may require the auxiliary equipment installer additional safety certification responsibility The Front Accessory Reserve Capacity FARC is added for customer convenience Rear ballast weight behind the rear axle may be required to prevent exceeding the FGAWR and provide front to rear weight b
33. 49 scccccaceheesvechedswets severance 91 J Jump starting your vehicle 343 K Keyless entry system AUILOLOCK samenee 156 keypad o eeescceesseccseeseeeseseeees 166 locking and unlocking doors 167 programming entry code 166 KEYS maneres gana 168 169 positions of the ignition 274 L Lamps autolamp system cc0000 89 daytime running light 90 fog lamps sieivecsevveccsapeseeeaecieces 89 Headlamps siiasersiiairetiiuiri 89 headlamps flash to pass 90 instrument panel dimming 91 interior lamps cceeeeeeeeeees 95 replacing bulbs 97 102 LATCH anchors cccccceeeeeee 214 Lights warning and indicator 14 anti lock brakes ABS 280 Limited slip axle ccccceee 283 Load limits wo ce eeeeeceeeeseeeeees 255 Loading instructions 261 Locks AUTOLOCK SANEPA PTE 156 ChildproOf anne 159 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus QOOES ei sediscdecssidsecscspbancceteosdoat sane 155 LUS NULS sinere ror e 342 Lumbar support seats 175 176 M Manual transmission 288 fluid capacities 0 405 TEVELSE T AE NE 290 Message center 008 127 137 english metric button 142 system check button 140 warning messages 132 144 V0 0 re 110 111 automatic dimming rearview TUTOR 25 doce ches do scone dnecnensncieise
34. 4x4 control to 2WD at any forward speed Disengagement of the transfer case and front hubs may be delayed due to torque bind which is caused by driving on dry hard surfaces or performing tight turns while using the 4x4 system e You do not need to operate the vehicle in R Reverse to disengage your front hubs but it will eliminate any torque bind and allow the system to immediately disengage Shifting from 4x4 HIGH to 4x4 LOW e If the range shift requirements are not met the 4x4 Low indicator will flash continuously 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 Place the gearshift in N Neutral If the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission also depress the clutch pedal 301 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving 3 Move the 4x4 control to the 4x4 LOW position 4X4 4 Hold the shift conditions until the ap 4x4 LOW indicator light illuminates 5 If the 4x4 LOW indicator light flashes continuously for more than 10 seconds allow the vehicle to move at a speed below 5 mph 8 km h then repeat steps 2 through 5 while the vehicle is rolling before reporting any shift concerns to your authorized dealer Shifting from 4x4 LOW to 4x4 HIGH or 2WD e If the range shift requirements are not met the 4x4 Low or 4x4 High indicator will flash continuously depending on which mode the shift began 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 Place the gearshift in N Neutra
35. Also available with 6 4L diesel engine and TorqShift transmission Part number is FT 176 4Also available with 6 4L diesel engine and TorqShift transmission Part number is FT 175 404 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications TV TSEL6IN SSM dL 0A TV G9D9N SSM 10 V c909W SSM O T WNd V C6TOCNC ISM TO OPTMSLAX V 8T60 GIN SSM STO O6MSLAX V G6TOCINC ISM TO OPTMSLAX TV LOGOTISSM T X V L6TOGIN dSM TO 06 MO08 AX UOT VITFIO0ds pIo Jequinu Ied pIo parofoo moyTeA yuelooy oulsuy ploy WNW 119 1010 PIM JLIJ IPUPA T00 LOG PVuULewIoj dq USI YLIDIOJON queoqnT RKYV IY oreyyuds OPI MGLZ AVS YLIDIOJONW queowiqn V TIY oeyUAg O6 MSL AVS YEIIOJONW queowqn oXV Ivey oreyyudAs OPI MGL AVS Ie1010 0 asvaly suLiveg TO QYM PU O XV W014 PXP sInyeJoduiey Usty queolqn a Xy Tey UMI 06 M08 AVS YLeI1070W TO S z SUISUS BA syrenb 7 92 Ip g yuelooo oulsuy IIOAIOSaL uo Yo NT 107 dos 10 oul 0 MA p ddmb jr ping yom pue pmyz ayetg COETS OTTS Lued squid WD SMC OFT Oggogp a ape may COSIN VNV Top squid g g OSE xe IRay ore your 09 0T e squid 6 t 1g yurd 6 9 O0SE 0GZ L Teayy sJILI9VdY ANY SNOILVOISIDAdS LONQOYd J NVYNALNIVN 405 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus CIP TST suoyes 0 OF 16 EFT suoyes 0 8E IFEST
36. CMCV VCT IMTV Diesel engine VPWR Engine loads Diesel engine VPWR ECM CHANGING A FLAT TIRE If you get a flat tire while driving e do not brake heavily e gradually decrease the vehicle s speed e hold the steering wheel firmly e slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road 326 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Your vehicle may be equipped with a conventional spare tire that is different in one or more of the following type brand size speed rating and tread design If this is the case this dissimilar spare tire is still rated for your vehicle loads GAWR and GVWR Temporary spare tires are not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS sensors if the system is present WARNING The use of tire sealant may damage your Tire Pressure Monitoring System if equipped and should not be used WARNING If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it will no longer function Dissimilar spare tire wheel information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel then it is intended for temporary use only This means that if you need to use it you s
37. F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls e Always use grab handle when stepping up and down e Step not intended for bare footed use e Keep step clean from contamination before use e g snow mud e Keep the step load you load below 350 lb 159 kg e Never drive with step deployed To close the tailgate step 1 Close the step panel then lift and fully close the tailgate step into the tailgate 2 Slide the latch at the bottom of the handle then lower the handle Note e Fully close and latch the tailgate step before moving the vehicle e Never drive with the step or grab handle deployed e Replace slip resistance tape serviceable item if worn out e Replace handle molding serviceable item if damaged e Do not tow with grab handle or step frame Bed extender if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a cargo management feature in the truck bed Note This feature is not intended for off road usage To open the bed extender into tailgate mode 1 Pull the locking pin toward the center of the vehicle 152 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls 2 Open the latches to release the panels 3 Rotate the panels toward the tailgate 4 Connect the two panels then rotate both knobs a quarter turn clockwise to secure the panels 153 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printi
38. If fuel is splashed in the eyes remove contact lenses if worn flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin and or clothing promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction WARNING When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke while refueling Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes WARNING The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container 385 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Refueling WARNING Fuel vapor burns viole
39. MP3 folder in random order Press again to stop SCAN Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current MP3 folder Press again to stop FOLDER LIST Press access folder mode and to go to the previous next folder in the MP3 disc MP3 disc quality factors Several factors can effect disc playback quality e Disc capacity Each disc contains about 650 MB of storage capacity We do not recommend using high capacity discs containing 700MB of storage e Disc type Some CD RW discs may operate inconsistently and may cause an error message to appear We recommend burning MP3 files onto CD R discs Disc finalization The disc may be left open for the purpose of adding sessions to it at a later time but be sure to close each session or the disc will not play DVD MP3 FOLDER1 TRACK 00 24 gt ELP The Only Way mp3 SHUFFLE 70 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems e Bit rate The player supports bit rates from 32 320 kbps as well as variable bit rate MP3 files but lower bit rates will have a noticeable effect on sound quality and are recommended only for speech or low fidelity music material We recommend that you encode MP3 files using a high quality encoder e PC configuration Encoding MP3 files requires intensive use of your computer s resources Follow the PC configuration recommendations of the encoder software vendor We recommend that you
40. On the wall or screen locate the high intensity area of the beam pattern The left edge of the high intensity area should be even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment If the left edge of the high intensity area is not even with the vertical line follow the next step to adjust it 8 Locate the horizontal adjuster 1 for each headlamp Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise to place the left edge of the high intensity area even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment Vertical aim adjustment aerodynamic headlamps The headlamps on your vehicle can only be vertically adjusted Your vehicle does not require horizontal aim adjustments To adjust the headlamps 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 3 25 feet 7 6 meters 93 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Lights e 4 Horizontal reference line 2 Measure the height from the center of your headlamp indicated by a 3 0 mm circle on the lens to the ground and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height a piece of masking tape works well 3 Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood Cover one of the headlamps so no light from that
41. Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 4 Press and hold the brake pedal for two 2 seconds then release 5 Turn the ignition to off DO NOT remove the key 6 Cycle the ignition from off to on three 8 times ending in on DO NOT start the engine If the reset mode has been entered successfully the horn will sound once the TPMS indicator will flash and the message center will display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode the horn does not sound the TPMS indicator 2 does not flash and the message center does not display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE seek service from your authorized dealer 252 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 7 Train the TPMS sensors in the tires using the following TPMS reset sequence starting with the left front tire in the following clockwise order 1 Left front tire Front driver s side 2 Right front tire Front passenger s side 3 Right rear tire Rear passenger s side 4 Left rear tire Rear driver s side 8 Left front tire Place the TPMS reset tool against the left front tire where the tire meets the rim opposite from the valve stem 1 as shown This is where the sensor is located inside the rim The tool needs to be held against the tire sidewall opposite the valve stem as illustrated with the arrow on the tool pointing towards the rim do not u
42. S SW W and NW in the message center display The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large buildings bridges power lines and powerful broadcast antenna Magnetic or metallic objects placed in on or near the vehicle may also affect compass accuracy Usually when something affects the compass readings the compass will correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal conditions If the compass still appears to be inaccurate a manual calibration may be necessary Refer to Compass zone calibration adjustment 142 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls Most geographic areas zones have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps This variation is four degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the vehicle crosses multiple zones A correct zone setting will eliminate this error Refer to Compass zone calibration adjustment Compass zone calibration adjustment 1 Determine your magnetic zone by referring to the zone map 2 Turn ignition to the on position 3 Start the engine 4 From the SETUP menu press and release the RESET button until ZONE lt XX gt the message center display changes aa to show the current zone setting RESET CHANGE XX 5 Press and release the RESET button repeatedly until the correct zone setting for your geographic location is displayed on
43. Start the engine 4 Press the brake pedal and move the gearshift lever to the desired gear 1 First or R Reverse 5 Release the parking brake then slowly release the clutch pedal while slowly pressing on the accelerator During each shift the clutch pedal must be fully depressed to the floor Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it doesn t interfere with the full extension of the clutch pedal Failure to fully depress the clutch pedal to the floor may cause increased shift efforts prematurely wear transmission components or damage the transmission Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill These actions will severely reduce the life of the clutch and could nullify a clutch warranty claim Recommended shift speeds Do not overspeed the engine when going downhill or steep grades If equipped use the tachometer and do not allow engine speed to exceed the redline area Operating the engine beyond the recommended speeds can cause severe engine damage Shift according to the following shift speed charts Upshifts when accelerating recommended for best fuel economy Shift from Mae ne eaure TO Overdrive 289 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving Maximum downshift speeds 6 speed transmission Shift from Transfer case position if equipped 2H or 4H 4L
44. Systems To auto load up to 6 discs press and hold LOAD until the display reads AUTOLOAD Load the desired disc label side up The system will prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots Insert the discs one at a time label side up when prompted Once loaded the disc in the last slot loaded will begin to play Note An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 folder T001 track in the display An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 track in the display Refer to MP3 track and folder structure later in this chapter for further information 18 amp CD eject To eject a disc from the system press amp Select the correct slot number using memory presets 1 6 When ready the system will eject the disc and the display will read REMOVE CD If the disc is not removed in 15 seconds the system will reload the disc To auto eject up to 6 CDs press and hold amp until the system begins ejecting the current disc Remove the current disc and the next disc will be ejected If the current disc is not removed the system will reload the disc 19 CD slot Insert a CD label side Sez up Auxiliary input jack if equipped WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehi
45. Tow Haul feature when driving in icy or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control 104 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR IF EQUIPPED Lift the mirror cover to turn on the Ay visor mirror lamp e jJ OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The appearance of your vehicle s overhead console will vary according to your option package If your vehicle is equipped with a moon roof refer to Moon roof later in this chapter for information on its operation Storage compartment if equipped Press the release on the door to open the storage compartment The storage compartment may be used to secure sunglasses or a similar object and the front tab can be used for holding tickets paper envelopes etc The front bin may be used to store small objects 105 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls CENTER CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features These include e Utility compartment with cassette CD holder Coin holder e Pen holder e Writing surface e A power point inside the utility compartment and on the rear of the console Laptop storage Hanging file folder supports Rear cupholders Crew Cab only WARNING
46. Use only soft cups in the cupholder Hard objects can injure you in a collision Center console under seat storage Cabela s Edition if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a lockable compartment in the center console and a lockable storage area under the rear seats Center console storage Use the vehicle s ignition key to lock unlock the compartment 106 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls Under seat storage Flip the rear seat cushion up to access the rear under seat storage area See Seating in the Seating and safety restraints chapter for more information Use the vehicle s ignition key to lock unlock the compartment Release the lid latches to open the storage area AUXILIARY POWER POINT 12VDC Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlet for this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty O Jid PASSENGER AIRBAG The auxiliary power point is located on the instrument panel On SuperCab and Crew Cab models another power point is located on the rear of the center console if equipped Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element if equipped 107 2009 F 250 350
47. a honk to indicate the system has been enabled 158 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Locks and Security CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS IF EQUIPPED e When these locks are set the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside J e The rear doors can be opened from the outside when the doors are unlocked The childproof locks are located on rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door Setting the lock for one door will not automatically set the lock for both doors e Move lock control up to engage the childproof lock e Move lock control down to disengage the childproof lock REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is approximately 33 feet 10 meters A decrease in operating range could be caused by e weather conditions e nearby radio towers e structures around the vehicle or e other vehicles
48. a soft cloth wiping from the center to the edge 1 Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode 2 Insert a CD into the system label side up to turn on the DVD system It will load and automatically begin to play If there is already a CD in the system press PLAY on the DVD player 3 The disc will begin to play and CD AUDIO DISC mx 2 00 54 the CD Audio Disc screen will TRACK display From this screen you can also select from COMPRESSION SHUFFLE and SCAN features To play an MP3 disc in the DVD system 1 Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode 2 Insert an MP3 disc into the system label side up to turn on the DVD system It will load and automatically begin to play If there is already a disc in the system press PLAY on the DVD player 3 The disc will begin to play and DVD MP3 FOLDER TRACK7 00 24 O the MP3 Audio Disc screen will display and allow you to access the COMPRESSION SHUFFLE SCAN and FOLDER MODE features FOLDE COMP SHUFFLE To play an auxiliary source through the DVD system The DVD system can be used to connect and play auxiliary electronic devices such as game systems personal camcorders video cassette recorders etc 53 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 1 Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode 2 Press the power button to
49. adjusts to your movement However if you brake hard turn hard or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph 8 km h or more the safety belt will become locked and help reduce your forward movement Lap belts Adjusting the lap belt WARNING The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the hips not across the waist e Ist row center seating position on SuperCab and Crew Cab The lap belt does not adjust automatically 186 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Insert the tongue into the correct NW buckle the buckle closest to the 7 direction the tongue is coming from To lengthen the belt turn the tongue at a right angle to the belt and pull across your lap until it reaches the buckle To tighten the belt pull the loose end of the belt through the tongue until it fits snugly across the hips Shorten and fasten the belt when not in use Safety belt warning light and indicator chime A The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts 187 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Conditions of operation The driver s safety belt is not The safety belt warning light buckled before the ignition switch illuminates 1 2 minutes and the is turned to the on position warning chime soun
50. and using your USB port in the SYNC supplement or Navigation system supplement GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION Radio frequencies AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC Those frequencies are AM 530 540 1700 1710 kHz FM 87 7 87 9 107 7 107 9 MHz Radio reception factors There are three factors that can affect radio reception e Distance strength The further you travel from an FM station the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings power lines electric fences traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a broadcast tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency is displayed CD CD player care Do e Handle discs by their edges only a Never touch the playing surface Inspect discs before playing Clean only with an approved CD cleaner 45 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems e Wipe discs from the center out Don t e Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time e Clean using a circular motion CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4 75 in 12 cm audio compact discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re
51. and Specifications WARNING When lifting a plastic cased battery excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps resulting in personal injury and or damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners WARNING Keep batteries out of reach of children Batteries contain sulfuric acid Avoid contact with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention If acid is swallowed call a physician immediately WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Because your vehicle s engine is also electronically controlled by a computer some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance To begin this process 1 With the vehicle at a complete stop set the parking brake 2 Put the gearshift in P Park automatic transmission or the neutral position manual transmission turn off all accessories and start the engine 3 Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature Allow the engine
52. and operating instructions before operating the system and retain for future reference 76 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Do not attempt to service repair or modify the Family Entertainment System FES See your dealer Do not insert foreign objects into the DVD compartment WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves WARNING The front glass on the liquid crystal display LCD flip down screen may break when hit with a hard surface If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water WARNING The driver should not attempt to operate any function of the DVD system while the vehicle is in motion Give full attention to driving and to the road Pull off the road in a safe place before inserting or extracting DVDs from the system A remote control is included in the system to allow the rear seat occupants to operate the FES functions without distracting the driver Do not expose the liquid crystal display LCD flip down screen to direct sunlight or intensive ultraviolet rays for extensive periods of time Ultraviolet rays deteriorate the liquid crystal Be sure to review User Manuals for v
53. avoid running other software applications on your PC during MP3 encoding to avoid undesirable noise and distortion CD MP3 and CD player care e Handle discs by their edges only Never touch the playing surface e Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time e Do not insert more than one disc into the slot of the CD player Cif equipped e Always store discs out of direct sunlight Excessive heat may damage or warp discs Use care when handling and playing CD R and CD RW discs which are more susceptible to damage from heat light and stress than are regular CDs e Always insert and remove a disc by holding the disc flat with the playing surface facing down in order to prevent damage to the disc or the player e Never insert any object other than a compact disc CD or digital versatile disc DVD into the player as doing so may damage the player and may cause injury to you e Do not disassemble the player The laser used in disc playback is extremely harmful to the eyes 71 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems The FES DVD system is designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm 4 75 in audio compact discs and digital versatile discs DVD DVD R and R W discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD and DVD players Irregular shaped
54. brake depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1 First 2 Turn off the engine and remove the key 3 Block the wheels e UD o m Working with the engine on e Automatic transmission 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Block the wheels e Manual transmission 1 Set the parking brake depress the clutch pedal place the gearshift in N Neutral and release the clutch pedal 368 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 2 Block the wheels WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running OPENING THE HOOD qm 1 Inside the vehicle pull the hood release handle located under the bottom left corner of the instrument panel SS 2 Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch located below the passenger side of the grille next to the headlamp Slide the handle to release the auxiliary latch 3 Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open 369 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT Refer to the 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplemen
55. cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Ford Motor Company 356 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Customer Assistance To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http jvww safercar gov or write to Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue Southeast Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Transport Canada using their toll free number 1 800 333 0510 307 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A which is available from your authorized dealer e Never use strong household detergents or so
56. center in the Driver controls chapter Note The autolock feature can be activated deactivated independently of the autounlock feature Power door lock switch autolock enable disable procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 1 Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the on position 2 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition from the on l position to the off position 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 156 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Locks and Security 5 Turn the ignition back to the on position The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 6 To enable disable the autolock feature press the unlock control then press the lock control The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autolock was activated 7 Turn the ignition to the off position The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete Keyless entry keypad autolock enable disable procedure 1 Turn the ignition to the off position 2 Close all the doors 3 Enter
57. child safety seat with combination lap shoulder belts e Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position e Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle e Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to prevent accidental unbuckling Place vehicle seat back in upright position e Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode Refer to step 5 below WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with combination lap shoulder belts Note Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat 1 Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt WARNING An airbag can kill or injure a child in a child seat Child seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats unless the passenger airbag switch is turned off See Passenger airbag on off switch 207 2
58. connected cell phone disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or in certain vehicles the activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators the vehicle location and or other details about the vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not activate the feature See your SYNC supplement for more information 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Introduction Vehicle Modification Data Recording Some aftermarket products may cause severe engine and or transmission damage refer to the What is not covered section in The new vehicle limited warranty for your vehicle chapter of your vehicle s Warranty Guide for more information Some vehicles are equipped with Powertrain Control Systems that can detect and store information about vehicle modifications that increase horsepower and torque output this information cannot be erased and will stay in the system s memory even if the modification is removed When a dealer or repair facility works on your vehicle it may be necessary for them to access the information in the Powertrain Control System This information will likely identify if any unauthorized modifications have been made to the system an
59. control module if equipped Diesel engine Engine compartment starter relay diode gasoline engines 28 5A i 320 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Location Rating Not used spare Not used spare Not used spare 32 10A Restraints Control Module RCM Passenger Airbag Deactivation Indicator 33 10A Trailer tow brake controller Trailer tow battery charge relay coil 35 10A Reverse Sensing System RSS 4x4 module 4x4 solenoid Traction control switch Tow Haul switch Diesel engine transceiver Cluster control control PTC control amplifier module SYNC mirror Lock switch illumination Heated seat relay coil Upfitter switch relay coils Heated mirror relay coil module Run customer access feed PTO 321 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating relay coil 47 30A Circuit Power windows Moon roof OO S S a power Siang a d Power distribution box The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment The power distribution box contains high current fuses that protect your vehicle s main electrical systems from overloads WARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses WARNING To reduce risk of electrical shock always replace the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnect
60. deployment it is normal to notice a smoke like powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant This may consist of cornstarch talcum powder to lubricate the bag or sodium compounds e g baking soda that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue is toxic While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries it may also cause minor abrasions swelling or temporary hearing loss Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures facial and eye injuries or internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment Thus it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control WARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation 195 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING If the air bag has deployed the air bag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the air bag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision The SRS consists of e driver and passenger airbag
61. e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability Stopping and securing the vehicle WARNING To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure the parking brake is set then block in both directions the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the tire being changed Refer to the instruction sheet located in the glove box for detailed tire change instructions Park on a level surface activate hazard flashers and set the parking brake e Automatic transmission Place gearshift lever in P Park e Manual transmission Place gearshift lever in R Reverse Electronic Shift On the Fly ESOF 4x4 Place transfer case in 4x4 HIGH or 4x4 LOW before turning off the engine e Manual shift transfer case 4x4 Place transfer case in 4H or 4L 330 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location of the spare tire and tools If your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire jack and associated tools refer to the following table for their locations Tool Spare tire pick up trucks only Under the vehicle just forward of the rear bumper Jack Regular cab and Crew Cab Fastened to floor pan behind rearmost seat on passenger side SuperCab Under rear bench seat on passenger side Jack handle lug wrench lug Regular cab Fastened to floor wrench extension only available behind driver se
62. entry keypad to lock or unlock the doors without using a key f 6 85 T o b The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5 digit entry code this code is located on the owner s wallet card in the glove box is marked on the computer module and is available from your authorized dealer You can also create your own 5 digit personal entry code When pressing the controls on the keypad press the middle of the controls to ensure a good activation 165 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Locks and Security Programming a personal entry code and keypad association to memory seats mirrors and pedals To create your own personal entry code 1 Enter the factory set code 2 Within five seconds press the 1 e 2 on the keypad 3 Enter your personal 5 digit code Each number must be entered within five seconds of each other 4 To associate the entry code with a memory setting enter a sixth digit to indicate which driver should be set in a memory recalled by the personal entry code e Pressing 1 e 2 recalls Driver 1 settings e Pressing 3 e 4 recalls Driver 2 settings e Pressing other keypad buttons or not pressing a keypad button as a sixth digit does not set a driver and will not recall a memory setting Note The factory set code cannot be associated with a memory setting 5 The doors will again lock then unlock to confirm that your person
63. for the next SETUP MENU item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the INFO MENU Language Note When entering the SETUP MENU and a non English language I ANGUAGE has been selected PRESS RESET 3 FOR ENGLISH will be displayed to ENGLISH change back to English 1 Select this function from the SETUP MENU for the current language to be displayed 2 Press and hold the SELECT RESET buttonto select a new language Selectable languages are English Spanish and French 3 Press the SELECT RESET button for the next SETUP MENU item or wait for more than four seconds to return to the INFO MENU System check Press and hold the SELECT RESET button to select SYSTEM CHECK when HOLD RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK is displayed in the message center Selecting this function from the INFO MENU causes the message center to cycle through each of the systems being monitored For each of the monitored systems the message center will indicate either an OK 130 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls message or a warning message for two seconds Pressing the SELECT RESET button cycles the message center through each of the systems being monitored The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the message center is as follows 1 OIL LIFE ENGINE HOURS ENGINE IDLE HOURS Diesel engine only CHARGING SYSTEM AIR FILTER Diesel engine only D
64. full upright position past detent to turn on the interior lamps Note If the battery is disconnected j discharged or a new battery is installed the dimmer switch requires re calibration Rotate the dimmer switch from the full dim position to the full dome on position to reset This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting conditions AIMING THE HEADLAMPS Your vehicle may be equipped with a sealed beam or aerodynamic headlamp system Sealed beam headlamps may be aimed in the vertical up down and the horizontal left right directions using the procedures following The aerodynamic headlamps can only be aimed in the vertical direction up down using the procedures following The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant and should not normally need adjusting Vertical and horizontal aim adjustment sealed beam headlamps The headlamps on your vehicle are intended to be aimed using mechanical aimers If mechanical aimers are used and the cross car sight line is in any way blocked set the legs of the universal adaptor all to the same setting such that the cross car sight line is no longer blocked per the instructions for the brand of mechanical aimer used You can also aim the headlamps visually using the procedure below 91 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Lights To adjust the headlamps 1 Park your vehicle on a level surface ab
65. grade or with a trailer press and hold the brake pedal down then set the parking brake There may be a little vehicle movement as the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle s weight This is normal and should be no reason for concern If needed press and hold the service brake pedal down then try reapplying the parking brake Chock the wheels if required If the parking brake cannot hold the weight of the vehicle the parking brake may need to be serviced or the vehicle may be overloaded TRACTION CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a Traction Control system This system helps you maintain the stability and steerability of your vehicle especially on slippery road surfaces such as snow or ice covered roads and gravel roads The system will allow your vehicle to make better use of available traction in these conditions During Traction Control operation the traction control light will TRIP XXXX X illuminate and the engine will not qgg90c o rev up when you push further on the accelerator This is normal system behavior and should be no reason for concern Also if traction control is on when the vehicle is put Vv A mi 281 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving into four wheel drive mode if equipped the traction control system will be automatically disabled Traction control operation will resume when the vehicle is placed back into two wh
66. grease on the battery terminals on the back K Z N EN AYALLVE 3JDVId 3 Remove the old battery M Note Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries SIVNINYAL H NOL LO ATVH Y3HLO N 4 Insert the new battery Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity 5 Snap the two halves back together J Note Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to become deprogrammed from your vehicle The remote transmitter should operate normally after battery replacement 162 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Locks and Security Replacing lost remote entry transmitters If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed because you lost one or would like to buy additional remote entry transmitters you can either reprogram them yourself or take all remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for reprogramming Note If your vehicle is equipped with the memory seats power mirrors adjustable pedals feature you can associate a remote entry transmitter to each memory position using this procedure The first transmitter that is programmed will recall Driver 1 settings and the second transmitter that is programmed will recall Driver 2 settings How to
67. headphones and a wireless infrared IR remote control To play a DVD in the DVD system The DVD system can play DVD Video DVD R DVD R W discs as well as audio CDs and video CDs To ensure proper disc operation check the disc for finger prints scratches and cleanliness Clean with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 1 Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode 2 Insert a DVD into the system label side up to turn on the system It will load automatically 3 Press the power button on the DVD player then press Play to begin to play the disc If a DVD is already loaded into the system press PLAY on the DVD player Note If sound can be heard but no video is present press VIDEO to select the video source DVD or aux inputs Press VIDEO to change the source displayed on the screen Press repeatedly to cycle through DVD DISC DVD AUX NON DVD OFF Press the power button to turn the system off The indicator light will turn off indicating the system is off Note The audio from the DVD system will play over all vehicle speakers and can be adjusted by the radio volume control 52 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems To play a CD in the DVD system The DVD system can play audio CDs CD R and CD R W CD ROM and video CDs To ensure proper disc operation check the disc for finger prints and scratches Clean the disc with
68. imitate behavior they see 189 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Reasons given Consider T have an airbag Airbags offer greater protection when used with safety belts Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers Td rather be thrown clear Not a good idea People who are ejected are 40 times more likely to DIE Safety belts help prevent ejection WE CAN T PICK OUR CRASH WARNING Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt Minder chime To do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle s air bag system One time disable Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an ignition on cycle the Belt Minder will be disabled for that ignition cycle only Deactivating activating the Belt Minder feature Driver only Read Steps 1 5 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation activation programming procedure The Belt Minder feature can be deactivated activated by performing the following procedure Before following the procedure make sure that the following conditions are met e the parking brake is set e the gearshift is in P Park automatic transmission or the neutral position manual transmission the ignition switch is in the off position all vehicle doors are closed the drive
69. in size diameter and or width tread type All Season or All Terrain or is from a different manufacturer other than the road tires on your vehicle your spare tire is considered temporary Consult information on the spare Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label for limitations when using Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for more information Trailer towing safety tips General Ensure that the trailer safety chains and 7 pin electrical connectors are securely fastened Make sure the truck receiver draw bar and coupler are properly connected and adjusted Check rear view and side mirrors for proper visibility especially when towing trailer wider than the truck When towing operate the vehicle at lower speeds than you would when not towing a trailer The likelihood of trailer sway is greater at higher speeds 270 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather hilly conditions at GCWR or any combination of these factors consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lubricant if not already so equipped Refer to Maintenance Product Specifications and Capacities in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for the proper axle lubricant Remember that r
70. is equipped with a one touch open feature Press and release the control The moon roof will open to the comfort position Press and release the control again to fully open To stop the one touch open feature press either the A or V control again WARNING When closing the moon roof you should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the moon roof opening To close the moon roof Press and hold the V control until the glass panel stops at the comfort position Press and hold the control again until the glass stops moving the moon roof does not go to the comfort position When fully closed the rear portion of the glass panel will appear higher than the front portion To vent the moon roof Press and hold the V control The moon roof must be in the closed position in order to move it into the vent position To close press and hold the A control until the glass panel stops moving The moon roof has a built in sliding shade that can be manually opened or closed when the glass panel is shut To close the shade pull it toward the front of the vehicle HOMELINK WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The HomeLink Wireless Control System located on the driver s visor provides a convenient way to A replace up to three hand held transmitters with a single built in O O O device This feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most transmitters to
71. lamp hits the wall 4 On the wall or screen you will observe a light pattern with a distinct horizontal edge towards the right If this edge is not at the horizontal reference line the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge is at the same height as the horizontal reference line ZA IK gt Sy XX 5 Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp then use a E5 Torx socket to turn the adjuster either counterclockwise to adjust down or clockwise to adjust up aligning the upper edge of the light pattern up to the horizontal line 6 Repeat Steps 3 5 for the other headlamp 7 Close the hood and turn off the lamps TURN SIGNAL CONTROL lt a D gt e Push down to activate the left turn signal e Push up to activate the right turn signal Y 94 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus MAP LAMPS IF EQUIPPED The dome lamp turns on when e any door is opened e the instrument panel dimmer switch is rotated up until the courtesy lamps come on and e any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off BULB REPLACEMENT Lamp assembly condensation Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure Condensation can be a natural by product of this design When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the te
72. modules which include the inflators and airbags e one or more impact and safing sensors e a readiness light and tone e and the electrical wiring which connects the components The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the supplemental airbag electrical system wiring including the impact sensors the system wiring the airbag system readiness light the airbag back up power and the airbag ignitors Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to Airbag readiness section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light will either OQ flash or stay lit On e The readiness light will not IN iluminate immediately after ignition is turned on A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and or light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision S O S Post Crash Alert The S O S Post Crash Alert automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag front side s
73. more viewing angles to select from Once you have made your selection press ENTER to confirm The system default is Angle 1 Aspect ratio Select ASPECT RATIO to select the viewing size and shape of the video SE DESIRED FUNCTION displayed on the LCD screen This is ANGLE 7 J ZOOM disc dependent E LANGUAGE SUB TITLES COMPRESSION RESTORE DEFAULTS BACK You can select from WIDE LETTER BOX or PAN SCAN Once you have SELECT THE DESIRED ASPECT RATIO made your selection press ENTER WIDE 16 9 to confirm The LCD screen display LETTER BOX will immediately change to your BASA selection after the system resumes playback of the DVD The system A default is WIDE 16 9 Language Select LANGUAGE to select the language you would like to use for audio output English Spanish French This is disc dependent LANGUAG SUB ES 68 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Once you have made your selection press ENTER to confirm The system default is English Subtitles Select SUBTITLES to turn the subtitle option on or off The system default is OFF COMPRESSION RESTORE DEFAULTS BACK Once you have made your selection press ENTER to confirm This is disc dependent Audio CDs To play audio CDs on your DVD system 1 Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode 2 Ensure that the DVD system
74. of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 1 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 4 2 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program located O on your visor while keeping the indicator light in view 2 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Note Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 2 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator and Canadian Programming in this section for Canadian residents 3 Firmly press and hold for five seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate the door If the door does not activate press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light 124 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls e If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released e If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with Programming Steps 4 through 6 to complete programming of a rolling code equippe
75. or Canadian Standards Association CSA Use only an extension cord that can be used outdoors in cold temperatures and is clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard e Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord minimum e Use as short an extension cord as possible e Do not use multiple extension cords Instead use one extension cord which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to the outlet without stretching e Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition not patched or spliced Store your extension cord indoors at temperatures above 32 F 0 C Outdoor conditions can deteriorate extension cords over a period of time e To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Also ensure that the block heater especially the cord is in good condition before use e Make sure that when in operation the extension cord plug engine block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order to prevent possible shock or fire e Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of all combustibles such as petroleum products dust rags paper and similar items e Be sure that the engine block heater heater cord and extension cord are solidly connected A poor connection can cause the c
76. or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you re driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer Front wheel drive FWD vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension if equipped may require alignment of all four wheels The tires should also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear Tire rotation Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in the scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle will help your tires wear more evenly providing better tire performance and longer tire life 236 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Rear Wheel Drive RWD vehicles Four Wheel Drive 4WD All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles front tires at top of diagram A SX AAAS AA A SA NANANN Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires Note If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissi
77. pedal 3 Move the transfer case shift lever through N Neutral directly to 4L 4x4 Low 4 If the shift lever does not or only partially moves to the 4L 4x4 Low position perform a shift with the transmission in N Neutral or clutch pedal depressed and the vehicle rolling at a speed below 5 mph 8 km h This will ensure the transfer case is fully engaged into 4L 4x4 Low Shifting from 4L 4x4 Low to 4H 4x4 High or 2H 2WD 1 Bring the vehicle to a stop or a speed below 5 mph 8 km h 2 Place the gearshift lever in N Neutral If the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission also depress the clutch pedal 3 Move the transfer case shift lever through N Neutral directly to 4H 4x4 High or 2H 2WD 4 If the transfer case will not engage into 4H 4x4 High or 2H 2WD perform a shift with the transmission in N Neutral or clutch pedal depressed and the vehicle rolling at a speed below 5 mph 8 km h 299 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving 5 If shifting to 2H 2WD with the vehicle at a complete stop disengage the locking hubs optional by rotating the hub lock control from LOCK to FREE Using the N Neutral position The transfer case neutral position overrides the transmission and puts the vehicle in neutral regardless of transmission gearshift lever position The vehicle can move forward or backwards This position should only be used
78. personal or commercial uses If your vehicle is equipped with this option there will also be a relay box located on the driver side end of the instrument panel See your authorized dealer for service The relays are coded as shown in the accompanying illustration 121 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls There will also be one power lead for each switch found as a blunt cut J k and sealed wire located below the S i instrument panel and to the left of the steering column They are coded as follows CACO5 CAC06 Green with Brown Trace CACO07 Violet with Green Trace CACOS More detailed information about the Upfitter switches can be found in the Upfitter Switches bulletin found at www fleet ford com truckbbas non html Q117R1 pdf MOON ROOF IF EQUIPPED The moon roof control is located on the overhead console WARNING Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave children unattended in the vehicle They may seriously hurt themselves Note The moon roof will open to the comfort position first before opening all the way The comfort position helps to alleviate rumbling wind noise which may happen in the vehicle with the roof fully opened 122 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls To open the moon roof The moon roof
79. q FOLDER to access the previous folder on MP3 discs if folders are available 10 FF Fast forward Press FF ea to manually advance in a CD MP3 track 11 REW Rewind Press REW to Ga manually reverse in a CD MP3 track Pees eae r CERES station Select frequency band AM FM1 FM2 tune to a station press and hold a preset control until sound returns You may store up to six stations in each frequency band for a total of 18 In satellite radio mode if equipped there are 18 available presets six each for SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 To save satellite channels in your memory presets tune to the desired channel then press and hold a preset control until sound returns Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 13 TEXT SCAN In radio and l CD MP3 mode press and hold for 2 seconds to activate mode to hear a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks Press again to stop 40 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems In CD MP3 mode press and release to display track title artist name and disc title and file name if available In satellite radio mode if equipped press and release to enter TEXT MODE and display the current song title While in TEXT MODE press again to scroll through the current song title artist channel category and the SIRIUS long channel name In TEXT MODE sometimes
80. recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players Do not use any irregular shaped CDs or discs with a scratch protection film attached 4 j P CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels should not be inserted into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ballpoint pens may damage CDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information 46 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Audio system warranty and service Refer to the Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide for audio system warranty information If service is necessary see your dealer or qualified technician MP3 track and folder structure Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure as follows e There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback MP3 track mode system default and MP3 folder mode For more information on track and folder mode refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following section e MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc The player numbers each MP3 track on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension from T001 to a maximum of T255 Note The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present
81. restraints 0000 180 185 Belt Minder ccccccccceceneee 188 extension assembly 191 for GOMES lt c cess scsecssqctviscesnes 181 185 for CHUN oss scccsvsseccas cers seeaesaees 201 418 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus lap Delt wo ececcseeseeeeeeenes 186 warning light and CHIME srie ronim edsa 187 188 Safety restraints LATCH ANCHOYLS oo cece cceeeesessecccseeeeeesseeees 214 Safety seats for children 206 Safety Compliance Certification Label 0 0000 410 Satellite Radio Information 48 DEALS aroe ae EET 171 child safety seats 1 000000000 206 CLEANING scssceseatstiness cane Hawenessesies 365 heated an aea EEEE 84 memory Seat oo 161 176 SecuriCode keyless entry SYSTEM een eee 165 SecuriLock passive anti theft SYSTEMI sccsauextovssaysecudavttscee sant 167 169 Servicing your vehicle 368 Setting the clock AM FM CD rrearen 30 AM FM In dash 6 CD 000 37 Snowplowing 00 10 311 312 Spark plugs specifications s 403 409 Special notice 0 0 cece cece 11 ambulance conversions 10 diesel powered vehicles 9 four wheel drive vehicles 313 utility type vehicles 0 0 9 Speed control ccceeeeeeeeeeee 116 Starting your vehicle 274 276 jump starting 0 ee 343 Steering wheel CONULOIS crispa 118 HINE eenn shasta TaN 104 SYN
82. returning to the road surface e It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly e It often may be less risky to strike small objects such as highway reflectors with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over Remember your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern 303 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If your vehicle gets stuck If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in e
83. temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster chapter for transmission fluid temperature information If the front or rear axle is submerged in water the axle lubricant should be replaced After driving through mud clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components Tread Lightly is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas Ford Motor Company joins the U S Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by treading lightly Driving on hilly or sloping terrain Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline you should always try to drive straight up or straight down Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills A danger lies in losing traction slipping sideways and possibly rolling over Whenever driving on a hill determine beforehand the route you will use Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer 307 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving When climbing a steep slope or hill start in a lo
84. that may cause undesired operation WARNING The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using a tire gauge see Inflating your tires in this chapter Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury Changing tires with TPMS Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor fastened to the inside rim of the wheel The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed The pressure sensor is located opposite 180 degrees from the valve stem Care must be taken when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using an accurate tire gauge refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter 245 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle The Low Tire Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is significantly low Once the light is illuminated your tires are under inflated and need to b
85. the power door lock control all the doors will lock then the driver s door will automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the ignition The vehicle can still be locked with the key in the ignition using the manual lock button on the door locking the driver s door with a key by simultaneously pressing button 7 e 8 and the 9 e 0 controls on the remote entry keypad if equipped or using the A button on the remote entry transmitter if equipped 155 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Locks and Security Autolock feature if equipped The autolock feature will lock all the doors when e all the doors are closed e the ignition is in the on position e you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion and e the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h for greater than two seconds The autolock feature repeats when e any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the on position and the vehicle speed is 9 mph 15 km h or lower and e the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h for greater than two seconds Deactivating activating autolock feature There are four methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer e by using a power door unlock lock procedure e using a keypad procedure if equipped or e or by using the instrument cluster message center if equipped Refer to Optional message
86. the bumper Place the tailgate harness out of the way under the pickup box 150 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls 4 Lower the tailgate 5 Using a screwdriver gently pry the spring clip on each connector past the head of the support screw Disconnect cable 6 Disconnect the other cable 7 Lift tailgate to a 45 degree angle from horizontal 8 Lift right side off of its hinge 9 Lift tailgate to a 80 degree angle from horizontal 10 Remove tailgate from left side hinge by sliding tailgate to the right To install follow the removal procedures in reverse order Tailgate step if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a feature that allows easier entry into the truck bed To open the tailgate step 1 Flip down the tailgate 2 Pull the yellow latch lever to the unlock positon fm to release the grab handle from its stowed postion and raise the handle upright until you feel it latch and see the latch lever in the lock positon a The yellow lever only needs to be used when releasing the grab handle 3 Rotate the center molding to unlatch the tailgate step and pull it towards you to extend it 4 Flip open the step panel to widen the step Note To reduce risk of falling e Operate step only when the vehicle is on level surface e Operate step only in areas with sufficient lighting e Always open flip panel to widen step 151 2009
87. the display requires additional text to be displayed When the gt indicator is active press SEEK to view the additional display text When the gt indicator is active press lt SEEK to view the previous display text In satellite radio mode if equipped press and hold to hear a brief sampling of the next channels Press again to stop In CATEGORY MODE press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of channels in the selected category Press again to stop Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 14 AM FM Press to select AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 15 ON OFF Volume Press to turn ON OFF Turn to increase decrease volume b Note If the volume is set above a VOL PUSH certain level and the ignition is turned off the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on 16 CD Press to enter CD MP3 mode If a CD is already loaded into the system CD MP3 play will begin where it ended last 17 LOAD To load a disc into the system press LOAD Select a slot number using memory presets 1 6 When the display reads LOAD CD load the desired disc label side up If you do not choose a slot within five seconds the system will choose for you Once loaded the first track will begin to play 41 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment
88. the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt 180 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position WARNING Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather they could burn a small child Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them WAR
89. the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes then wipe off the haze with a clean dry rag e Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface 358 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Cleaning After polishing chrome bumpers apply a coating of Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A available from your authorized dealer or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental effects WAXING e Wash the vehicle first e Do not use waxes that contain abrasives use Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A which is available from your authorized dealer or an equivalent quality product Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non body low gloss black colored trim such as grained door handles roof racks bumpers side moldings mirror housings or the windshield cowl area The paint sealant will gray or stain the parts over time PAINT CHIPS Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match your vehicle s color Take your color code printed on a sticker in the driver s door jamb to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color e Remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insect deposits tar spots road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips e Always read the instructions before using the prod
90. this guide before L i touching or attempting adjustment of any kind Protecting the environment We must all play our part in protecting the environment Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim Information in this respect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm PERCHLORATE MATERIAL Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules seat belt pretensioners and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Introduction BREAKING IN YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle does not need an extensive break in Try not to drive continuously at the same speed for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of new vehicle operation Vary your speed frequently in order to give the moving parts a chance to b
91. to delete press OK The song will appear in the display for confirmation Press OK again and the display will read SONG DELETED If you do not want to delete the currently listed song press A IV to select either RETURN or CANCEL Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS e DELETE ALL SONGS Press OK to delete all songs from the system s memory The display will read ARE YOU SURE Press OK to confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL DELETED ag there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO e ENABLE ALERTS DISABLE ALERTS Press OK to enable disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel The system default is disabled SONG ALERTS ENABLED DISABLED will appear in the display The menu listing will display the opposite state For example if you have chosen to enable the song alerts the menu listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on so your other option is to turn them off Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability AUTOSET Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET Autoset allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 Use A IV lt q SEEK SEEK to turn on off When the six strongest stations are filled
92. trained supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA regulations For example during any procedure involving tire inflation the technician or individual must utilize a remote inflation device and ensure that all persons are clear of the trajectory area WARNING An inflated tire and rim can be very dangerous if improperly used serviced or maintained To reduce the risk of serious injury never attempt to re inflate a tire which has been run flat or seriously under inflated without first removing the tire from the wheel assembly for inspection Do not attempt to add air to tires or replace tires or wheels without first taking precautions to protect persons and property 231 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Stay out of the trajectory 1 as indicated in the illustration TIRE CARE Inspecting your tires Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from the tire and make necessary repairs Also inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking cuts bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced For your safety ti
93. turn the DVD system on The indicator light next to the power button will illuminate 3 Connect an auxiliary audio video source by connecting RCA cords ey 2 4 not included to the RCA jacks on the left hand side of the system e Yellow 1 video input SP ee Ue e White 2 left channel audio input e Red 8 right channel audio input 4 Press MEDIA on the DVD system to change the media source to AUX 5 Press VIDEO on the DVD system to change the video source to DVD AUX If your source is properly plugged in it will appear on the LCD Liquid Crystal Display screen If your auxiliary source does not have a video signal or if the DVD system does not detect a video signal from the auxiliary source the screen will remain black If the video source is set to DVD AUX the display will automatically turn on if a video signal is detected To listen to audio over the headphones Dual play mode You may listen to channels A and B over wired or wireless headphones Refer to Using the infrared wireless headphones and Using wired headphones for further information e Black 4 wired headphone output wired headphones not included 1 Press the headphone speaker A button EZD on the DVD player or press the 2 and 4 memory presets on the radio at the same time A green light will illuminate next to either the A or B Headphone Control Button to indicate which channel is active able to be con
94. vehicle information through a constant monitor of 5 cg vehicle systems You may select 2 O display features on the message center for a display of status The system will also notify you of potential vehicle problems with a display of system warnings followed by an indicator chime For improved message center readability if your vehicle is equipped with Autolamp control the message center brightness cannot be adjusted when parking lamps or headlamps are on in bright daytime ambient conditions refer to Autolamp control in the Lights chapter In lower ambient light conditions the message center brightness can be adjusted using the panel dimmer control when parking lamps or headlamps are on refer to Panel dimmer control in the Lights chapter Selectable features Reset Press this button to select and reset functions shown in the INFO menu and SETUP menu 137 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls Info menu This control displays the following items e Trip odometer A or B e Engine hour meter odometer if equipped Distance to empty Average fuel economy Drive timer elapsed travel timer e Blank odometer and compass if equipped off Odometer Trip odometer Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter Engine hour meter if equipped Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter Distance to empty DTE Selecting this function from t
95. when towing the vehicle 2H 4H N 4L WARNING Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle Using the Electronic Shift On the Fly ESOF 4x4 system if equipped Positions of the electronic shift system Note Some noise may be heard as the 4WD system shifts or engages This is normal 2WD For general on road driving Sends power to the rear wheels only 4x4 HIGH For winter and off road conditions Sends power to front and rear wheels This mode is not intended for use on dry pavement 4x4 LOW For low speed off road applications that require extra power such as steep grades deep sand or pulling a boat out of the water Sends power to front and rear wheels This mode is not intended for use on dry pavement 300 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving Shifting from 2WD to 4x4 HIGH Rotate the 4x4 control to the 4x4 HIGH position at speeds up to 55 mph 88 km h e The electronic shift 4x4 system is designed to engage 4x4 HIGH when the vehicle is moving If shifted to 4x4 HIGH while at complete stop 4x4 may not engage and the 4x4 indicator may flash continuously until the vehicle is allowed to move at a speed above 1 mph 1 6 km h e Do not shift into 4x4 HIGH with the rear wheels slipping Shifting from 4x4 HIGH to 2WD Rotate the
96. while the front speakers play the chosen selection for the front audio system they may listen to another over the headphones DUAL PLAY will appear in the radio display When both the front seat passengers and the rear seat passengers listen to the same audio source SHARED MODE will appear on the radio Note If the front seat passengers are listening to the radio the rear seat passengers can also listen to the radio however they will be limited to listening to the same radio channel Press the A q headphone speaker an button on the DVD player or navigation radio touch screen The headphone control will now be active and a green light next to the A or B headphone control buttons will illuminate The system can output two different audio sources over the headphones These are called Channel A and Channel B Both Channel A and Channel B can be listened to on the wired headphones not included or on the infrared IR wireless headphones Press the Headphone Control button A to change the audio source for Channel A source for Channel A This information will display on the DVD system screen Press the Headphone Control button B to change the audio source for Channel B Press MEDIA to change the audio ma Press MEDIA to change the audio source for Channel B This information will display on the DVD system screen Channel B can listen to either the DVD media or the DVD system auxiliary inputs DVD AUX 66 2009 F 2
97. wiper blades and the windshield Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter To prolong the life of the wiper blades it is highly recommended to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element ENGINE OIL Y7 Checking the engine oil Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil 1 Make sure the vehicle is on level ground 2 Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park automatic transmission or 1 First manual transmission 4 Open the hood Protect yourself from engine heat 5 Locate and carefully remove the engine oil dipstick 373 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e 5 4L 6 8L gasoline engines only for diesel engine information refer to the 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement 6 Wipe the dipstick clean Insert the dipstick fully then remove it again If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks the oil level is acceptable DO NOT ADD OIL If the oil level is below the MIN mark add enough oil to raise the level within the MIN MAX range e Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine dam
98. would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 12 x 45 kg 635 198 540 103 kg You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 Ib 104 kg If you remove 3 100 lb 45 kg cement bags then the load calculation would be 1400 2 x 220 9 x 100 1400 440 900 60 Ib Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 9 x 45 kg 635 198 405 32 kg The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label found on the edge of the driver s door Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles WARNING For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in the Driving chapter of this Owner s Guide WARNING Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Extra precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars Depending upon the type and placement of the load hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle TRAILER TOWING Note The trailer towing charts in this s
99. your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this section Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates less than 34 F 36 C e It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50 e NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60 e Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months If you drive in extremely hot climates e It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40 e NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40 e Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive Vehicles driven year round in non extreme climates should use a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and eng
100. 0 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRES Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service but they must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them Glossary of tire terminology e Tire label A label showing the OE Original Equipment tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry e Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire Standard load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi 87 psi 2 5 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability Extra load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi 48 psi 2 9 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability e kPa Kilopascal a metric unit of air pressure e PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure e Cold inflation pressure The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mi
101. 0 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears In emergency stopping situations avoid locking of the wheels Use a squeeze technique push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing force which allows the wheels to brake yet continue to roll so that you may steer in the direction you want to travel If you lock the wheels release the brake pedal and repeat the squeeze technique If your vehicle is equipped with a Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS apply the brake steadily Do not pump the brakes Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti lock brake system Never drive with chains on the front tires of 4WD vehicles without also putting them on the rear tires This could cause the rear to slide and swing around during braking Maintenance and Modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability For this reason Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts such as lift kits or stabilizer bars or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment Any modifications to a vehicl
102. 009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats unless the passenger airbag switch is turned off 2 Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hear and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it 208 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 5 To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out cai 6 Allow the belt to retract to remove slack The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode you should not be able to pull more belt out If the retractor is not locked unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6 8 Remove remaining slack from the belt Force the seat down with ex
103. 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Children and booster seats vary in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder The drawings below compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder The drawings below also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child s hips If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat Check with the booster seat manufacturer s instructions The importance of shoulder belts Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child s head hitting a hard surface in a collision For this reason you should never use a booster seat with a lap belt only It is generally best to use a booster seat with lap shoulder belts in the back seat Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use 222 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Follow all instructions provided
104. 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum tongue weight exceeds the limit of the towing system and could result in vehicle structural damage loss of vehicle control and personal injury Weight distributing hitch When hooking up a trailer using a load equalizing hitch always use the following procedure 1 Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface With the ignition on and all doors closed allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level 2 Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle 3 Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within 2 inch 13 mm of the reference point After proper adjustment the rear bumper should be no higher than in Step 2 WARNING Do not adjust a weight distributing hitch to any position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it was before attaching the trailer Doing so will defeat the function of the weight distributing hitch which may cause unpredictable handling and could result in serious personal injury Safety chains Always connect the trailer s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch To connect the trailer s safety chains cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners If you use a rental trailer follow the i
105. 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls To prevent the fuse from being blown do not use the power point s over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC 180W If the power point or cigar lighter socket is not working a fuse may have blown Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on checking and replacing fuses To have full capacity usage of your power point the engine is required to be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery To prevent the battery from being discharged e do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running e do not leave battery chargers video game adapters computers and other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for extended periods Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used Cigar lighter if equipped Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter socket Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating this will damage the lighter element and socket The lighter will be released from its heating position when it is ready to be used Note Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your warranty and can result in fire or serious injury POWER WINDOWS IF EQUIPPED WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows They may seriously injure themsel
106. 4WD system Before 4X4 LOW can be engaged the vehicle speed must be below 5 mph 8 km h with the transmission in N Neutral If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission the clutch pedal also must be depressed The 4x4 Low indicator will flash continuously until these actions are performed by the user This vehicle is equipped with a non synchronous low range gearset which will not allow the transfer case to shift into 4X4 LOW if vehicle speed is above 5 mph 8 km h It is recommended that a shift to 4X4 LOW is performed while the vehicle is rolling at a speed below 5 mph 8 km h The 4WD system e provides 4x4 High engagement and disengagement while the vehicle is moving e is operated by a rotary control located on the instrument panel that allows you select 2WD 4x4 High or 4x4 Low operation 296 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving e uses auto manual hub locks that can be engaged and disengaged automatically based on the 4x4 mode selected e auto manual hub locks can be manually overridden by rotating the hub lock control from AUTO to LOCK if desired e automatic operation of the hub locks is recommended and will increase fuel economy e For proper operation make sure that each hub is fully engaged and that both hub locks are set to the same position both set to LOCK or both set to AUTO To engage LOCK turn the hub locks completely clockwise to engage AUTO
107. 50 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Diesel warning lights e Glow plug pre heat OY e Water in fuel TRIP XXX X Be O 0mi _ TRIP XXX X O 0 mi e Low oil pressure Key in ignition warning chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver s door is opened Headlamps on warning chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on the ignition is off the key is not in the ignition and the driver s door is opened Parking brake on warning chime Sounds when the parking brake is set the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km If the warning remains on after the parking brake is off contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Turn signal chime Sounds when the turn signal lever has been activated to signal a turn and not turned off after the vehicle is driven more than 2 miles 3 2 km Message center activation chime Sounds when some warning messages appears in the message center display for the first time Overspeed chime if equipped Sounds when the vehicle speed reaches 75 mph 120 km h or higher Airbag secondary warning chime Sounds to inform the driver in the event that the airbag readiness warning lamp is inoperable that there is a fault in the supplemental restraint system 20 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Instrument Cl
108. 50 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Operation with an aftermarket audio system Headphone only mode When the Family Entertainment System FES detects that the original radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the vehicle the Family Entertainment System will work in a state referred to as Headphone Only Mode While operating in Headphone Only Mode the system will have limited functionality e The system will only output audio to the headphones It will not be capable of providing audio to the speakers The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD DISC and DVD AUX regardless of headphone channel A or B e When a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode both headphone channels A amp B will be connected to FES DISC Menu mode Press MENU once on the DVD system to access the DVD disc menu if available Press MENU twice to access the DVD set up menu and the following features 1 ZOOM 2 ANGLE 3 ASPECT RATIO a 4 LANGUAGE i LANGUAGE SUBTITLES 5 SUB TITLES COMPRESSION RESTORE DEFAULTS Angle mode Select ANGLE to select various angles of view for the DVD ZOOM ante ASPECT RATIO LANGUAGE SUB TITLES COMPRESSION ff RESTORE DEFAULTS BACK 67 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems This is disc dependent some DVD discs may have
109. 50 DRW e Rear F 450 F 550 337 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 13 Insert the jack handle into the pump linkage 14 Use an up and down motion with the jack handle to raise the wheel completely off the ground Hydraulic jacks are equipped with a pressure release valve that prevents lifting loads which exceed the jack s rated capacity 15 Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench 16 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire making sure the valve stem is facing outward on all front an inboard rear wheels If replacing the outboard wheel the valve stem must be facing inward Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered 17 Lower the wheel by slowly turning the release valve counterclockwise Opening the release valve slowly will provide a more controlled rate of descent The following steps apply to all vehicles 18 Remove the jack and fully 1 tighten the lug nuts in the order shown Refer to Wheel lug nut torque specifications later in this chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification 8 lug nut torque sequence 338 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 10 lug nut torque sequence 10 1 19 Stow the flat tire Refer to Stowing the flat spare tire if the vehicle is equipped with a sp
110. 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire Illumination of the Service engine soon c indicator charging system warning light or the temperature warning light fluid leaks strange odors smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately WARNING Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine This decal also lists engine displacement Please consult your Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide for complete emission warranty information On board diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a com
111. 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner Guide Supplement Check the fluid level when it is at ambient temperature 20 F 80 F 7 C 25 C 1 Check the fluid level in the reservoir It should be between the MIN and MAX range Do not add fluid if the level is within this range 2 If the fluid level is low Add fluid to bring fluid level up to be between the MIN and MAX range 3 Start the engine 4 While the engine idles turn the steering wheel left and right several times 5 Turn the engine off 6 Recheck the fluid level in the reservoir Do not add fluid if the level is between the MIN and MAX range 395 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 7 If the fluid is low add fluid in small amounts continuously checking the level until it is between the MIN and MAX range Refer to Maintenance Products Specifications and Capacities in this chapter for the proper fluid type Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir BRAKE FLUID e Vacuum boost system e Hydroboost system The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when the brake components are replaced Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the performance of your brake system could be compromised seek
112. AC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers To protect your engine and engine s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W 20 or an equivalent SAE 5W 20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS M2C930 A SAE 5W 20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle s engine Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities later in this section for more information Do not use supplemental engine oil additives cleaners or other engine treatments They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not covered by Ford warranty Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance information Ford production and Motorcraft replacement oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design specifications start up engine noises or knock may be experienced 375 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or another with equivalent performance for your engine application BATTERY A WARNING This vehicle may be equipped with more than one battery removal of cable from only one battery does not disconnect the vehicle electrical system Be sure to disconnect cables from all batteries when disconnec
113. C eia r EE 79 T Tailgate sanscr 150 Temperature control see Climate control 80 Tilt steering wheel 104 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Tires Wheels and Loading 244 IOS sarres iaee 226 228 alignment scvcrevescrsvesssacveecesessscts 236 CALE E E E 232 Changing sser risie 330 332 checking the pressure 231 MAaAtNE esenee 229 lapel ae Sethet cee aee 243 VEPIACING ssi die serceisecvennavventerendees 234 POLINES Se nap 236 safety practices cccceeee 235 sidewall information 238 snow tires and chains 254 Spare Tire piosan en 327 329 terminology secciicsscseretesyeeess das 228 tire grades a csrcsescigciessawveieeseeieats 227 tread Weal scisverscisccterecesss 227 233 TOWNE cisisesacasuisesesssassumesiaesbaane 261 recreational towing 05 272 Trailer Brake Controller Integrated 266 trailer towing 0 261 wrecker oo cecceccccceesseseessseeseeenaes 348 Traction Control ceeeeeees 281 Trailer Brake Controller Integrated 00 266 Transfer case fluid checking isuse 401 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Index Transmission automatic operation 104 284 brake shift interlock BSD 284 fluid checking and adding AULOMALIC si crcscisssecncensaaes 397 fluid checking and adding manual essenin erone 400 fluid refill capacities
114. CDs or DVDs CDs or DVDs with a scratch protection film attached and CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels should not be inserted into the FES DVD system The label may peel and cause the CD or DVD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs or DVDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ball point pens may damage CDs or DVDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Playing a DVD 1 Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode 2 Ensure that the navigation system is on 3 Insert a DVD label side up into the system 4 Use the DVD bezel controls to Press to play or pause a DVD Press to stop or eject a DVD previous chapter Press and hold for a fast reverse search Press and release to go to the next chapter Press and hold for a fast forward search Press when not in menu mode to adjust brightness or when in menu mode to navigate through the menu selections r C Press and release to go to the Ea gt eS 72 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Press to adjust volume levels Slow play 1 With a DVD playing press pause a 2 Press and hold the reverse or advance button to enter into slow play mode Once in slow play mode press and release the reverse or advance button repeatedly to cycle through 1 4 and 1 2 These will display on the status bar o
115. Canister vent Diesel engine Engine Control Module M keep alive power OO 7 U eee TCM Diesel engine only P88 CC Noted S P89 50Aa ECM power Diesel engine Al 20A Power point Center console Front Trailer park lamp relay 324 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating Rear Trailer battery charge relay 45 30A Driver power seat or Memory module P49 aoas Wiper motor O 30A PCM relay coil PCM relay ee ne err PET CC Notos S PRC Noted S O 53 Relay PCM power bus Fuses 68 70 OOP ee ere Trailer tow park lamps Trailer tow battery charge 57 Relay Power Distribution Box PDB bus fuses 67 69 71 73 75 77 SJB Run Start bus Fuses 29 37 46 ESOF hi lo 59 Relay PCM power bus Fuses 68 70 72 74 76 Gasoline engines only o Diode One touch start OTIS S dNt se 325 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits ere oper PH Notused S O PTT s Notused S O PS s i Notus S O PDC Notus o O 70 10A Gasoline engines A C clutch relay coil Refrigerant Containment Switch Heated PCV Diesel engine A C clutch relay coil Clutch switch Fuel pump cooler A C cycle pressure switch PCM ECM Run Start power Diesel engine Engine TCM Reverse Camera System RCS 74 20A Gasoline engines VPWR HEGO CMS MAFS EVMV
116. Check your tire pressure to ensure tires are properly inflated refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter 2 After inflating your tires to the manufacturer s recommended inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label located on the edge of driver s door or the B Pillar the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph 32 km h before the light will turn OFF Your temporary spare tire is in use Repair the damaged road wheel tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description on how the system functions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section If your tires are properly inflated and your spare tire is not in use and the light remains ON have the system inspected by your authorized dealer On vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures the TPMS system must be retrained following every tire rotation Refer to Tire rotation in this chapter 247 Tires Wheels and Loading Low Tire Possible Customer Action Required Pressure cause Warning Light Flashing Spare tire in Your temporary spare tire is in use Warning Light use Repair the damaged road wheel and re mount it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description of how the system functions under these conditions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS If your tires are properly inflated malfunction and your sp
117. DUL paynpayIs INO 0 I J Y addy JOo1IOD ayy JO ST poppe sSurq pm 94 FA 0 JOUTeJUOD oY MOQO puey You sdrp oy 10 epeyq Yorsdrp oy uo poyeorpur ale SJU W IMD I PMJ UOISsTWsueL P SN ST pIN J UOTSsNuUsueI STUIONG JO9IIOI Y MSUYg gfotyaa MOA ul poddinbe Ayeurst1o d4 Juejoo 94 PPY IoyeM Ul poSIowqns Useq sey L y SsefUN SuTsueY IMD I JOU saop yey JULIANI IJOYJU S L ulejJuood Saxe IEI USIS P pIOJ SARL PAO dys poyury Jo MY94 oje durod 107 V 8TTOZNW LSH uoeoyrn dg pIo surjoour JusTeambe 10 TX I YPONW UOOA IAPIPPV JO TU 9EZ ZO 8 PPV ayerjusouoy qoyseyy pemspum TE g suenb a g pmi zoysem pperyspurLy Unud IYeIIIOJOWI cV 9TE8W dsM V G amp OZ UOTIVITFIVeds pIo 408 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications ENGINE DATA Engine 5 4L V8 engine 6 8L V10 engine 415 1 6 5 10 2 7 8 8 4 9 rer 1 0 1 1mm 1 0 1 1mm parx pug gap 0 039 0 043 inch 0 039 0 043 inch Ignition system Coil on plug Coil on plug Compression ratio osi a Drivebelt routing 5 4L V8 6 8L V10 engines 409 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Safety Compliance Certification Label The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO IN U S A that a Safety Compliance DATE XXXXX GVWR XXXXX LB X
118. Degreaser ZC 20 on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean e Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running water in the running engine may cause internal damage Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine e 5 4L V8 gasoline engine 360 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Cleaning e 6 8L V10 gasoline engine PLASTIC NON PAINTED EXTERIOR PARTS Use only approved products to clean plastic parts These products are available from your authorized dealer e For routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e If tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 e For plastic headlamp lenses use Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windshield rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly If the wipers do not wipe properly substances on the vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes water repellant coatings tree sap or other organic contamination these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of th
119. E Select this function to display your average fuel economy in miles gallon or liters km 27 om gt lt X FPG 0 0 mi 2 If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing miles traveled by gallons of fuel used liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons e Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill up e Differences in the automatic shut off points on the fuel pumps at service stations e Variations in top off procedure from one fill up to another e Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0 1 gallon liter 1 Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles 8 km with the speed control system engaged to display a stabilized average 128 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls 2 Record the highway fuel economy for future reference It is important to press the SELECT RESET button press and hold for two seconds in order to reset the function after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings Setup menu Press and hold the SELECT RESET button to get into the SETUP MENU HOLD RESET FOR sequence from the INFO MENU for SETUP MENL the following displays e Oil Life e Units English Metric e Language e Reset to English if in another language See Note below Note When returning to the SETUP menu and a non English HOLD RESET FOR langu
120. F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING The safety belts for the driver and right front passenger seating positions have been specifically designed to function together with the airbags in certain types of crashes When you turn OFF your airbag you not only lose the protection of the airbag you also may reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt system which was designed to work with the airbag If you are not a person who meets the requirements stated in the NHTSA Transport Canada deactivation criteria turning OFF the airbag can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision WARNING If your vehicle has rear seats always transport children who are 12 and younger in the rear seat Always use safety belts and child restraints properly DO NOT place a child in a rear facing infant seat in the front seat unless your vehicle is equipped with an airbag ON OFF switch and the passenger airbag is turned OFF This is because the back of the infant seat is too close to the inflating airbag and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the airbag inflates is substantial The vast majority of drivers and passengers are much safer with an airbag than without To do their job and reduce the risk of life threatening injuries airbags must open with great force and this force can pose a potentially deadly risk in some situations particularly when a front seat occupant is no
121. Introduction Instrument Cluster Warning lights and chimes Gauges Entertainment Systems AM FM stereo AM FM stereo with CD AM FM stereo with in dash six CD Auxiliary input jack USB port Satellite radio information Family entertainment system Navigation system SYNC Climate Controls Heater only Manual heating and air conditioning Dual automatic temperature control Lights Headlamps Turn signal control Bulb replacement Driver Controls Windshield wiper washer control Steering wheel adjustment Power windows Mirrors Speed control Upfitter controls Moon roof Message center 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Table of Contents 4 14 14 21 26 26 28 35 42 44 48 51 79 19 80 80 81 84 89 89 94 95 103 103 104 108 110 116 121 122 127 Table of Contents Locks and Security Keys Locks Anti theft system Seating and Safety Restraints Seating Safety restraints Airbags Child restraints Tires Wheels and Loading Tire information Tire inflation Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Vehicle loading Trailer towing Trailer brake controller integrated Recreational towing Driving Starting Brakes Traction Control Transmission operation Reverse sensing system Reverse camera Roadside Emergencies Getting roadside assistance Hazard flasher control Fuel pump shut off switch Fuses and relays Changing t
122. LACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy management feature e This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision e The front outboard safety belt systems have a retractor assembly that is designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest Safety belt pretensioner if equipped Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt retractor pretensioners at the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate only during certain frontal or near frontal collisions with sufficient longitudinal deceleration A safety belt pretensioner is a device which tightens the webbing of the lap and shoulder belts during some collisions in such a way that they fit more snugly against the body The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt system including retractors buckles and height adjusters must be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in the activation of the safety belt pre
123. MANUAL DIMENSIONS PRESSION A FROID SE OMAERE Mall LT225 75R 16 5E 200 KPA 29 PSI ee CONSULTER LE GUIDE LT225 75A 16 5E 200KPA 29 Psi OUPROPRIETAIRE T145 80016 420 KPA 60 PSI P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXX XX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX CARGO Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional equipment When towing trailer tongue load or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload 257 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR Note For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXL REAR GAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG WITH XXXXKG WITH XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES XXXX XX RIMS XXXX XX RIMS AT XXX kPa XX P
124. NING Front and rear seat occupants including pregnant women should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident Combination lap and shoulder belts 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming a 1 from until you hear a snap and feel a C it latch Make sure the tongue is a Aa securely fastened in the buckle 181 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 To unfasten push the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle N 1 ae N Vehicle sensitive mode Combination lap and shoulder belts in normal retractor mode allow free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement For example if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph 8 km h or more the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers Belt sensitive mode Combination lap and shoulder belts can also be made to lock manually by quickly pulling on the shoulder belt Automatic locking mode When to use the automatic locking mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt This mode should be u
125. O NOT inflate slowly there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag YI IMRI WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided 192 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position WARNING The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches 25 cm between an occupant s chest and the driver airbag module WARNING Never place your arm over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries To properly position yourself away from the airbag e Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably e Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position WARNING Do not put anything on or over the airbag module Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING The front passenger airbag is not des
126. OOR AJAR BRAKE SYSTEM 8 TBC GAIN XX X NO TRAILER if equipped and no trailer connected 9 TBC GAIN XX X OUTPUT Gf equipped and trailer connected 10 XX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL XXX Oil Life XXX HOLD RESET NEW An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and according to the recommended maintenance schedule USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS To reset the oil monitoring system to 100 after each oil change approximately 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months perform the following 1 Press and release the SETUP 33 0 HOLD E OIL LIFE XXX Noon WwW Dh HOLD RESET New 2 Press and hold the RESET control for two seconds and release T Oil life is set to 100 and OIL LIFE OIL LIFE JET SET TO 100 is displayed 10 100 Note To change oil life 100 miles value from 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months to another value proceed to Step 3 131 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls 3 Once OIL LIFE SET TO XXX is displayed release and press the RESET control switch to change the Oil Life Start Value Each release and press will reduce the value by 10 System warnings System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems In the event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for
127. Printing USA fus Climate Controls In X panel or panel floor modes 1 Move temperature control to full cold 2 Select A C and recirculated air Use recirculated air with A C to provide colder airflow 3 Set highest fan speed initially then adjust to maintain comfort To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select A 2 Select A C 3 Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort 4 Set the fan speed to the highest setting 5 Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel 88 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus HEADLAMP CONTROL O Turns the lamps off ps Turns on the parking lamps instrument panel lamps license plate lamps and tail lamps ZD Turns the headlamps on Autolamp control if equipped The autolamp system provides light sensitive automatic on off control of the exterior lights normally controlled by the headlamp control The autolamp system also keeps the lights on for approximately 20 seconds or on vehicles equipped with a message center you can select a delay from 0 180 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to off e To turn autolamps on rotate the control counterclockwise e To turn autolamps off rotate the control clockwise to the off position Fog
128. Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 5 Return air filter cover to original position making sure the four tabs are engaged and secure the three clamps Tighten clamp on air tube and reconnect sensor MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS PO sage Spark pusen J 1The PCV valve is a critical emission component It is one of the items listed in the scheduled maintenance information and is essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system For PCV valve replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the PCV valve Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as a Motorcraft or equivalent replacement part The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not used For spark plug replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs 403 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as Motorcraft or equivalent replacement parts The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used
129. QUIPPED The perimeter anti theft system will warn you in the event of an unauthorized entry to your vehicle If there is any potential perimeter anti theft problem with your vehicle ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are taken to the authorized dealer to aid in troubleshooting Arming the system When armed this system will respond if unauthorized entry is attempted When unauthorized entry occurs the system will flash the park turn lamps and will sound the horn The system is ready to arm whenever the key is removed from the ignition Either of the following actions will prearm the alarm system e Press the a control on the remote entry transmitter e Open a door and press the power door lock control to lock all the doors and then close the door Disarming the system You can disarm the system by any of the following actions e Unlock the doors by pressing the control on your remote entry transmitter Unlock the doors with a key Turn the key full travel toward the front of the vehicle to ensure the alarm disarms e Turn the ignition to the on position with a programmed coded ignition key Triggering the anti theft system The armed system will be triggered if any door or hood is opened without using the key or the remote entry transmitter 170 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints SEATING WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant
130. SA fus bolt from the top and bottom of the 2 Remove the three screws and one park lamp bezel assembly 3 Remove the four screws and the headlamp retaining ring from headlamp 4 Disconnect the electrical connector from the headlamp i ot Replacing park turn sidemarker bulbs sealed beam Install the new bulb s in reverse order 1 Make sure that the headlamps are off and open the hood 2 Remove the three screws and one bolt from the top and bottom of the park lamp bezel assembly 3 Pull the assembly straight out disengaging snap clip 99 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Lights 4 Remove the bulb assembly sidemarker or park turn by turning it counterclockwise Top view of assembly shown 5 Pull the old bulb out from the socket Install the new bulb s in reverse order Replacing brake tail turn back up lamp bulbs Pick ups only 1 Make sure the headlamps are off and then open the tailgate to expose the lamp assemblies 2 Remove the two bolts from the tail lamp assembly and carefully pull the lamp assembly from the tailgate pillar by releasing the two retaining tabs 3 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp assembly 4 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket Install the new bulb s in reverse order Replacing brake tail turn back
131. SLCOLD 4f ATEXXX KPalxXx PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PNT _ XX RC XX DSO WB BRK TINTTR TIPPS R TAXLE TR SPR XXXXX XXX X XX X XX XXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXK XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all options equipment passengers and cargo The GVWR is shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The GVW must never exceed the GVWR 258 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of control and personal injury Gew GCW Gross Combined Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage Important The towing vehicle s braking system is rated f
132. TFE based products e Do not use exterior paint waxes or sealants Dust the low gloss areas with a clean dry cloth or use Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 or ZC 25 or Motorcraft Dusting Cloth Mitts ZC 47 363 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Cleaning INTERIOR For fabric carpets cloth seats and safety belts e Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 If grease or tar is present on the material spot clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover ZC 14 In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner CXC 101 e If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring will set e Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials WARNING Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s seatbelts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing LEATHER SEATS IF EQUIPPED EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH F 250 AND F 350 CREW CAB Your leather seating surfaces have a clear protective coating over the leather For King Ranch F 250 and F 350 Crew Cab leather seats refer to separate section in this chapter e For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp clot
133. TPMS reset procedure after tire rotation when recommended pressures are different for the front and rear tires TPMS reset tool A special TPMS reset tool to reset your TPMS after tire rotation is provided with vehicles that have different front and rear tire pressures The tool is located with your Owner s Guide materials 249 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Storing the TPMS reset tool You should store the TPMS reset tool in the provided pocket of the owner guide case however before storing it you will need to remove and discard the loose strip of Velcro this is the piece of Velcro with the adhesive protection film on it you will not need this portion of the Velcro strip for this vehicle application The other portion of the Velcro strip soft portion should remain on the TPMS reset tool Note Don t discard just the adhesive protector Remove and discard the whole Velcro strip see illustration this will ensure a good fit of the tool in the pocket of the owner guide Store the TPMS reset tool in the pocket of your owner s guide case as shown for safe keeping When you are ready to use the TPMS reset tool remove it from the pocket by pushing up on the bottom of the pocket pushing the tool out rather than reaching into the pocket and pulling it out If you find that the reset
134. USA fus Entertainment Systems AUDIO SYSTEMS AM FM stereo system if equipped VOL PUSH WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so The AM FM stereo system does not contain rear speakers only front driver side and passenger side speakers Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay With this feature the window switches and radio may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is opened I A IV Tuner Press to manually go up or down the radio frequency Press and hold for a fast advance through radio frequencies Also use in AUDIO mode to gain access to various settings 26 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 2 AUDIO Press AUDIO repeatedly to gain access to the following settings TREB Treble Press AUDIO to reach the treble setting Use A W lt SEEK P BASS Bass Press AUDIO to reach the bass setting Use amp Vi lt q SEEK BAL Balance Press AUDIO to reach the balance setting Use A IV lt SEEK gt to adjus
135. Wheels and Loading VEHICLE LOADING WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment 255 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading PAYLOAD Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX Ib for maximum payload The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle
136. Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle If necessary add enough 50 50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level If you have to add more than 1 0 quart 1 0 liter of engine coolant per month have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system Your cooling system may have a leak Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available D Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids 381 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle s cooling system can hold refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine refer to the Maintenance Product Specifications and Capacities section of your 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement Fill
137. XXXX KG ee i FGAWR XXXXXX XXXXXXX RGAWR XXXXXXX XXXXXXX Certification Label be affixed to a THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE vehicle and pr escribe where the DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE Safety Compliance Certification VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Label may be located The Safety DUUN AIL O OUT UO TAT TA Fv Compliance Certification Label is MAXIMUM LOAD OCCUPANTS LUGGAGE XXXKG XXXXLB 1 d m by th OCCUPANTS X TOTAL X FR X 2ND X RR OCCUPANTS LUGGAGE ocated on the structure by the XX XXXKG XXXXLB iJi iver TIRE XXXX XXXXX XXX X XXXKG XXXXLB trailing edge of the driver s door or PRESSURE FR XXX kPa XX PS COLD the edge of the driver s door PRESSURE RR XXX kPa XX PSI COLD TRAILER TOWING SEE OWNER GUIDE EXT PNT XXXXXX XXXXXX_ RC XX DSO XXXX F0000 BART INTTR TP PS TR AXLE TR SPR T0000 x XX XXX X X XXXX UTC VFOHT 15294A10 GA Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number is located on the driver side instrument panel XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your kK vehicle identification number 410 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The Vehicle Identification Number VIN contains the following information 1 World manufacturer identifier XX X XXX XX X X XXXXXX 2 Bra
138. YCD WXYZ etc BASS Press MENU to reach the bass setting Use W lt q SEEK SEEK P to adjust TREB Treble Press MENU to reach the treble setting Use VW lt SEEK SEEK P to adjust BAL Balance Press MENU to reach the balance setting Use A IV lt SEEK SEEK to adjust the audio between the left L and right R speakers FADE Press MENU to reach the fade setting Use amp W lt j SEEK SEEK p gt to adjust the audio between the back B and front F speakers ALL SEATS Occupancy mode Available on Audiophile radios only Press MENU repeatedly to access Press A IV 4 SEEK gt to optimize sound for ALL SEATS DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS SPEEDVOL Speed sensitive volume if equipped Press MENU to reach the SPEEDVOL setting Radio volume automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Use W lt SEEK SEEK P to adjust The default setting is off increasing your vehicle speed will not change the volume level Adjust 1 7 Increasing this setting from 1 lowest setting to 7 highest setting allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Recommended level is 3 SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting Track Folder Mode Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode In Track Mode pressing A SEEK will scroll through all tracks on the disc In Folder
139. a Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner Canada only CXC 93 Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner Canada only CXC 94 Motorcraft Wash and Wax Canada only CXC 95 Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A 367 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle we provide scheduled maintenance information which makes tracking routine service easy If your vehicle requires professional service your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service Check your Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide to find out which parts and services are covered Use only recommended fuels lubricants fluids and service parts conforming to specifications Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE e Do not work on a hot engine e Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts e Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space unless you are sure you have enough ventilation e Keep all open flames and other burning cigarettes material away from the battery and all fuel related parts Working with the engine off Automatic transmission Set the parking brake and shift to P Park Turn off the engine and remove the key Block the wheels Manual transmission Set the parking
140. above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects WARNING To help avoid personal injury please read and understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this section Reverse sensing is only an aid for some generally large and fixed objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS this may include reduced performance or a false activation WARNING To help avoid personal injury always use caution when in reverse and when using the RSS WARNING This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle The system may not detect smaller objects particularly those close to the ground WARNING Certain add on devices such as large trailer hitches bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps 291 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving The RSS detects obstacles up to 6 feet 2 meters from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper refer to the figures for approximate zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 10 inche
141. ach gear Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Refer to Transmission fluid temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster chapter for transmission fluid temperature information Emergency maneuvers e In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made remember to avoid over driving your vehicle i e turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control not more Additionally smooth variations of the accelerator and or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for Avoid abrupt steering acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and or personal injury Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel e In the event of an emergency stop avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements 304 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as uti
142. afety restraints for children in this chapter for more information Attaching child safety seats with tether straps Many forward facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle The passenger seats of your vehicle may be equipped with built in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below 214 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The tether anchors in your vehicle may be straps on the seatback or an anchor bracket on the rear edge of the seat cushion or an anchor bracket mounted to the body shell on the back panel The SuperCab rear seat has three straps behind the top of the seat back that function as both routing loops for the tether straps and anchor loops The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions shown from top view e F Series Regular Cab 4 4 8 9 e F Series SuperCab hf ma i amp amp Er E E E
143. ag ON OFF switch WARNING Front seating positions only If seating two adults and a child Ford recommends properly restraining the child in the center front seating position but only if doing so will not interfere with driving the vehicle This arrangement provides lap and shoulder belt and airbag protection for adult occupants and an attachment method for a child restraint If the child seat interferes with driving the vehicle and the child restraint is forward facing the child may be restrained in the passenger seat Move the seat as far rearward as possible to minimize the likelihood of interaction with the front passenger airbag Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag Always properly restrain all occupants including the child in an appropriate child seat or booster 194 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains sufficient longitudinal deceleration The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Airbags are designed to inflate in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollover side impact or rear impacts The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation After airbag
144. age Some oil must be removed from the engine by a service technician 7 Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated Adding engine oil 1 Check the engine oil For instructions refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter 2 If the engine oil level is not within the normal range add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening 3 Recheck the engine oil level Make sure the oil level is not above the normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick 374 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 4 Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated 5 Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise 1 4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated To avoid possible oil loss DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and or the engine oil filler cap removed Engine oil and filter recommendations Look for this certification trademark Use SAE 5W 20 engine oil Only use oils Certified For Gasoline Engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILS
145. age has been selected HOLD x r RESET FOR ENGLISH will be ENGLISH displayed to change back to English Press and hold the SELECT RESET button to change back to English Oil Life XXX HOLD RESET NEW An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and according to the recommended maintenance schedule USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS To reset the oil monitoring system to 100 after each oil change approximately 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months perform the following 1 Press and release the SELECT RESET button to display vvvo OIL LIFE XXX HOLD RESET OIL LIFE XXX NEW HOLD RESET NEW 129 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls 2 Press and hold the SELECT RESET button for two 1 T seconds and release Oil life is set to oiL LIFE JET 100 and OIL LIFE SET TO 100 T0 100 is displayed Note To change oil life 100 miles value from 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months to another value proceed to Step 3 3 Once OIL LIFE SET TO XXX is displayed release and press the SELECT RESET button to change the oil life start value Each release and press will reduce the value by 10 Units English Metric 1 Select this function from the SETUP MENU for the current units UNITS to be displayed lt ENG gt fiETRIC 2 Press and hold the SELECT RESET button to change from English to Metric 3 Press the SELECT RESET button
146. aged power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case 4WD can be selected when additional driving power is desired 4WD operation is not recommended on dry pavement Doing so could result in difficult disengagement of the transfer case increased tire wear and decreased fuel economy 295 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving Manual Shift On Stop MSOS 4x4 system if equipped The 4WD system is engaged or disengaged by rotating the control for both front wheel hub locks from the FREE or LOCK position then manually engaging or disengaging the transfer case with the floor mounted shifter For increased fuel economy in 2WD rotate both hub locks to the FREE position e For proper operation make sure that each hub is fully engaged and that both hub locks are set to the same position both set to LOCK or both set to FREE To engage LOCK turn the hub locks completely clockwise to disengage the hubs FREE turn the hub locks completely counterclockwise Some vehicles may be equipped with wheel ornaments that cover the 4x4 manual hub lock These ornaments must be removed to access the manual hub locks Electronic Shift On the Fly ESOF 4x4 system if equipped If equipped with the electronic shift 4WD System and the instrument panel control is moved to 4X4 LOW while the vehicle is moving above 5 mph 8 km h the system will not engage and no damage will occur to the
147. ailable only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability AUTOSET Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET Autoset allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 Use A V lt q SEEK SEEK P to turn on off When the six strongest stations are filled the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are less than six strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets RBDS Available only in FM mode This feature allows you to search RBDS equipped stations for a certain category of music format CLASSIC COUNTRY INFORM JAZZ RB ROCK etc To activate press MENU repeatedly until RBDS ON OFF appears in the display Use W lt SEEK P gt to toggle RBDS ON OFF When RBDS is OFF you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations or view the station name or type To search for specific RBDS music categories When the desired category appears in the display press A IV to find the desired type then press and release d SEEK SEEK gt or press and hold SCAN to begin the search 37 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems To view the station name or type When the desired category appears in the display press TEXT SCAN to toggle between displaying the station type COUNTRY ROCK etc or the station name W
148. al keycode has been programmed to the module Tips e Do not set a code that uses five of the same number e Do not use five numbers in sequential order e The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal code Erasing personal code 1 Enter the factory set 5 digit code 2 Within five seconds press the 1 e 2 on the keypad and release 3 Press and hold the 1 e 2 for two seconds This must be done within five seconds of completing Step 2 Your personal code is now erased and only the factory set 5 digit code will work Anti scan feature If an incorrect code has been entered seven times 35 consecutive button presses the keypad will go into an anti scan mode This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash during this time 166 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Locks and Security The anti scan feature will turn off after e one minute of keypad inactivity e pressing the control on the remote entry transmitter e the ignition is turned to the on position Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry To unlock the driver s door enter the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each other The interior lamps will illuminate after entering a valid keypad entry code To unlock all doors press the 3 e 4 control within five seconds To lock all doors press t
149. al tires because they may lower the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations WARNING Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal injury Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ib on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lb 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 lb and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb 1400 750 5 x 150 650 lb In metric units 635 340 5 x 68 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following gives you a few e
150. alance for proper braking and steering e Front wheel toe may require re adjustment to prevent premature uneven tire wear Specifications are found in the Ford Workshop Manual Headlight aim may require re adjustment e The tire air pressures recommended for general driving are found on the vehicle s Safety Certification Label The maximum cold inflation pressure for the tire and associated load rating is imprinted on the tire sidewall Tire air pressure may require re adjustment within these pressure limits to accommodate the additional weight of the snowplow installation Federal and some local regulations require additional exterior lamps for snowplow equipped vehicles Consult your authorized dealer for additional information 311 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving e The snow plow prep package includes a unique powertrain control strategy which is required for diesel engine cooling during highway driving with the snowplow raised Operating the vehicle with the snowplow attached Do not use your vehicle for snow removal until it has been driven at least 500 miles 800 km The attached snowplow blade restricts airflow to the radiator and may cause the engine to run at a higher temperature Attention to engine temperature is especially important when outside temperatures are above freezing Angle the blade to maximize airflow to the radiator and monitor engine temperature to determi
151. and inspect the fluid level 3 Add only enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications Refer to the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this chapter 401 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications AIR FILTER Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element When changing the air filter element use only the Motorcraft air filter element listed Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter The following procedure is for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine refer to the 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement Note Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running Changing the air filter element 1 Loosen clamp and disconnect sensor 2 Release three retainer clamps 3 Pull air filter cover toward passenger side of vehicle and up to release the tabs Lift air filter element up and out of housing The air filter box needs to be free of any debris before installing a new air filter 4 Install a new air filter element into the tray assembly 402 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd
152. and weight of the child When installing a child safety seat e Review and follow the information presented in the Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS section in this chapter Carefully follow all of the manufacturer s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle If you do not install and use the safety seat properly the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat Installing child safety seats with automatic locking mode combination lap and shoulder belts all front and rear outboard passenger seat positions Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat 206 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints When installing a
153. ap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces e Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight e Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results e Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting e It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle e Immediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle s paintwork and trim over time Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 which is available from your authorized dealer e Remove any exterior accessories such as antennas before entering a car wash e Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash off as soon as possible e If your vehicle is equipped with running boards do not use rubber plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running board surface as the area may become slippery Exterior chrome e Wash the vehicle first using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 available from your authorized dealer Apply
154. are tire carrier Note Do not stow the Harley Davidson flat tire and wheel using the spare tire winch mechanism store the flat in the bed of the truck 20 Stow the jack jack handle and lug wrench Make sure the jack is securely fastened so it does not rattle when driving 21 Unblock the wheels The following step applies to F 250 F 350 Single Rear Wheel SRW vehicles only 22 When installing the wheel center ornaments ensure that the ornament retention towers on the back side of the ornament are aligned with the studs lug nuts The retention towers are designed to be installed over the studs nuts and retain to the flange on the lug nut 339 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies If the ornament retention towers are aligned between the studs lug nuts the ornament is improperly installed This improper installation may appear and sound correct but will not keep the ornament on the vehicle Ornaments improperly installed in this manner will fall off or become loose with minimal force or impact Installing dual rear wheel ornaments 1 Align the ornament with the lug nuts e 1 is the clip and 2 is the flange 2 Hold the ornament so that all of the retention clips are sitting on the flange of the lug nuts 3 Use your hand or rubber mallet to tap the ornament in a star pattern There should be an even gap between the orna
155. are tire is not in use and the TPMS warning light still flashes have the system inspected by your authorized dealer When inflating your tires When putting air into your tires such as at a gas station or in your garage the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph 82 km h for the light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure How temperature affects your tire pressure The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire While driving in a normal manner a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi 14 to 28 kPa from a cold start situation If the vehicle is stationary over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi 20 7 kPa for a drop of 30 F 16 6 C in ambient temperature This lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning for low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light is ON visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat If one or more tires are flat repair as necessary Check air pressure in the road tires If any tire is under inflated carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location whe
156. as FULL enabled The FES has control over the primary speaker and secondary headphone audio sources LOCAL The FES has control over the secondary source headphones only The radio will ignore button presses that affect the primary speaker audio source LOCKED disabled The FES buttons are locked and all FES button presses are ignored by the radio and the FES except for load and eject When the DVD system is ON you can then press the memory preset O CJ CG C CJ Ce controls 2 and 4 simultaneously to toggle between Single Play and Dual Play In Single Play mode all speakers listen to the same media In Dual Play mode rear seat passengers can use the infrared wireless or wired not included headphones to listen to a different playing media than the front seat passengers 75 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems General information Note DVDs are formatted by regions US and Canada systems can only play region 1 DVDs and Mexico systems can only play region 4 DVDs Systems sold in vehicles targeted for other parts of the world would have different regions If a playback problem is encountered please ensure that you are using a disc designed for your vehicle The region coding can be found stamped on the disc or on the box and can say region 1 or region 4 etc They may also be marked by a numerical symbol Macrovision This pro
157. as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or authorized dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity Chow much space is available or by payload capacity how much weight the vehicle should carry Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there is space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover 256 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Example only TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTALS FRONT2 REAR3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs 7 MANUAL FOR 200 KPA 29 Ps ADDITIONAL SPARE 7145 80D16 420 KPA 60PSI INFORMATION P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXX XX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TIRE AND LOAD INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS RELATIFS AUX PNEUS ET LA CHARGE SEATING CAPACITY FRONT XX REAR x NOMBRE DE PLACES AVANT ARRI RE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg La charge du v hicule occupants et bagages ne doit jamais d passer XXX Ibs TIRE COLD TIRE PRESSURE see ownens
158. at on Dual Rear Wheel DRW SuperCab Fastened to floor under vehicles and wheel chock only rear seat available on Single Rear Wheel Crew Cab Fastened to floor SRW vehicles equipped with a behind rear seat at driver side diesel engine In the glove box Removing the spare tire with spare tire carrier only 1 The following tools are required to remove the spare tire e one handle extension and two S amp S Ss gt typical extensions To assemble LS align button with hole and slide parts together To disconnect depress button and pull apart e one wheel nut wrench Slide over square end of jack handle 331 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels insert the lug QP wrench extension into the lug wrench to reach the lug nuts PA r d 2 Attach the spare tire lock key A A to the jack handle B a 3 Fully insert the jack handle with one extension through the bumper hole and into the guide tube The key and lock will engage with a slight push and counterclockwise turn Some resistance will be felt when turning the jack handle assembly 1 a 4 Turn the handle counterclockwise and lower the spare tire until you can slide the tire rearward and the cable is slack 5 Remove the retainer through the center of the wheel Tire change procedure WARNING When on
159. atch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on the tongue 5 Push down on the child seat while pulling on the loose end of the lap belt webbing to tighten the belt 6 Before placing the child into the child seat forcibly tilt the child seat from side to side and in forward direction to make sure that the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back There should be no more than one inch 2 5 cm of movement for proper installation 7 Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST to make certain the child restraint is properly installed Note For Super Cab and Crew Cab there is no top tether anchor for the front center seating position See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter Attaching child safety seats with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren attachments The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points two 2 lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet called the seat bight and one 1 top tether anchor located behind that seating position Your vehicle is not equipped with the lower anchor points in the seat bight For this vehicle use the vehicle safety belt and upper tether to secure a child seat See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching s
160. ately and consistently as possible Fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of driving engine break in period You will get a more accurate measurement after 2 000 miles 3 000 miles 3 000 km 5 000 km Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section of this chapter The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank e Turn the engine ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running 389 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23
161. belt webbing above the tongue is the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap shoulder belt WARNING Always use both lap and shoulder safety belt in the Regular Cab center seating position if applicable Note Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat 1 Position the child safety seat in the center seat 210 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints A WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move seat all the way back WARNING Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active airbag 2 Slide the tongue up the webbing 3 While holding both shoulder and lap portions next to the tongue route the tongue and webbing through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure that the belt 4_ webbing is not twisted 211 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for that seating positions until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely latched to the buckle by pulling on the tongue 5 Remove remaining slack from the belt Force the seat down with extra weight e g by pressing down or kneelin
162. bs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability It is not recommended that the vehicle be operated in 4WD modes with a temporary emergency spare tire If 4WD operation is necessary do not operate above speeds of 10 mph 16 km h or for distances above 50 miles 80 km 3 Full size dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel do not e Exceed 70 mph 113 km h e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire wheel at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire wheel The usage of a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability Wet weather driving capability e All Wheel driving capability Gf applicable Load leveling adjustment if applicable 328 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel additional caution should be given to e Towing a trailer e Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body e Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel and seek service as soon as possible Spare tire information Note If your vehic
163. by the manufacturer of the booster seat WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision Child restraint and safety belt maintenance Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if necessary All vehicle safety belt assemblies including retractors buckles front safety belt buckle assemblies buckle support assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters if equipped shoulder belt guide on seatback if equipped child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching hardware should be inspected after a collision Refer to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced However if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or imprope
164. ce on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or JATMA Japan Tire Manufacturing Association 2 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 65 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width 4 R Indicates a radial type tire 5 15 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter 6 95 Indicates the tire s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your Owner s Guide If not contact a local tire dealer Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law 7 H Indicates the tire s speed rating The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the followin
165. certain faults in the vehicle wiring and trailer wiring brake system Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT if equipped Displayed and accompanied by a single chime in response to faults sensed by the TBC Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAILER CONNECTED if equipped Displayed when a correct trailer connection a trailer with electric trailer brakes is sensed during a given ignition cycle Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAILER DISCONNECTED if equipped Displayed and accompanied by a single chime when a trailer connection becomes disconnected either intentionally or unintentionally and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately Refer to Brake fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter LOW TIRE PRESSURE if equipped Displayed when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT if equipped Displayed when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on con
166. choices Selectable languages are English Spanish or French 3 Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds to set the language choice 4 Press the SETUP button to exit System warnings System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems In the event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four seconds The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no more warning messages This allows you to use the full functionality of the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the RESET button and clearing the warning message Warning messages that have been reset are divided into two categories e They will reappear on the display 10 minutes from the reset e They will not reappear until an ignition off on cycle has been completed 144 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within the vehicle Warning returns after 10 minutes if condition still exists Warning returns after the ignition key is turned from off to on equipped equipped equipped Warning can be cleared by pressing the RESET button Warning can reappear if the condition is still present Warning will reappear on the Tire sensor fault if equipped next ignition
167. cle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so 42 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Your vehicle may be equipped with an Auxiliary Input Jack AIJ The Auxiliary Input Jack located on the instrument panel below the power point provides a way to connect your portable music player to the in vehicle audio system This allows the audio from a portable music player to be played through the vehicle speakers with high fidelity To achieve optimal performance please observe the following instructions when attaching your portable music device to the audio system If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system refer to Auxiliary input jack section in the Audio features chapter of your Navigation system supplement Ey Required equipment 1 Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones 2 An audio extension cable with stereo male 1 8 in 3 5 mm connectors at each end To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack 1 Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off 2 Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully charged and that the device is turned off 3 Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ in your vehicle 4 Turn the radio on usin
168. cs and climate Traction AA ABC The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature AB C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 139 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 227 2009 F 25
169. cted category Press and hold A SEEK SEEK gt to fast seek through the previous next channels In TEXT MODE press lt Q SEEK SEEK P gt to view the previous additional display text In CATEGORY MODE press lt SEEK SEEK gt to select a category Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 6 11 OK Play Pause This control is operational in CD MP3 mode When a CD MP3 is playing press to pause or play the current CD MP3 The CD MP3 status will display in the radio display OK Use in various menu selections If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES please refer to the DVD supplement for further information 7 SHUFFLE In CD MP3 mode press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle mode SHUFFLE ON will appear in the display If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away press SEEK to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing CD SHUF will appear in the display To disengage press SHUFFLE again SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display Note In CD MP3 mode press SHUFFLE to play the tracks in random order In MP3 folder mode the system will randomly play all tracks within the current folder 32 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 8 FOLDER In folder mode press FOLDER gt to access next folder on MP3 di
170. ction from the SETUP menu causes the message DREGS REGET center to cycle through each of the EOR S45 CHECK systems being monitored For each of the monitored systems the message center will indicate either an OK message or a warning message for three seconds Pressing the RESET button cycles the message center through each of the systems being monitored The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the message center is as follows 1 OIL LIFE Gas engine only 2 ENGINE HOURS 3 ENGINE IDLE HOURS Diesel engine only 4 CHARGING SYSTEM 140 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls 5 AIR FILTER Diesel engine only 6 DOOR AJAR 7 BRAKE SYSTEM 8 TBC GAIN XX X NO TRAILER if equipped and no trailer connected 9 TBC GAIN XX X OUTPUT Gf equipped and trailer connected 10 FUEL LEVEL Oil Life XXX HOLD RESET NEW An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and according to the recommended maintenance schedule USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS To reset the oil monitoring system to 100 after each oil change approximately 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months perform the following 1 Press and release the SETUP bd 33 0 HOLD RESET NEW O DIL LIFE XXX HOLD RESET NEW 2 Press and hold the RESET control for two seconds and release T Oil life is set to 100 and OIL LIFE ae SET TO 100
171. d Ford authorized service facilities and that the diagnostic information may be used for any purpose See your SYNC supplement for more information 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Introduction Event Data Recording Other modules in your vehicle event data recorders are capable of collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event The recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the occupants potentially including information such as e how various systems in your vehicle were operating whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled how far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or the brake pedal how fast the vehicle was traveling and e where the driver was positioning the steering wheel To access this information special equipment must be directly connected to the recording modules Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada Please note that once 911 Assist Gf equipped is enabled set ON 911 Assist may through any paired and
172. d device most commonly a garage door opener 4 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the learn or smart button usually near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit 5 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Note There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 6 6 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence again and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device To program additional HomeLink buttons begin with Step 1 in this section For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Gate Operator amp Canadian Programming During programming your hand held transmitter may aa automatically stop transmitting not allowing enough time for HomeLink to accept the signal from the hand held transmitter After completing Step 1 outlined in the Programming section replace Step 2 with the following Note If programming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent overheating 125
173. d may be used to determine if repairs will be covered by warranty Special instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls WARNING Please read the section Airbag Supplemental Restraint System SRS in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury WARNING Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Introduction Cell phone use The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs However drivers must not compromise their own or others safety when using such equipment Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile Communication Equipment includes but is not limited to cellular phones pagers portable email devices in vehicle communications systems telematics devices and portable two way radios WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus o
174. d to forward search a DVD Video CD or FES CD in DVD CD mode 5 I1 Play Pause Press m Play to select DVD mode and to turn the DVD system on if it is off If a disc is present it will resume or begin to play Press Pause while playing a disc to pause a DVD or CD 6 On Off Press to turn the DVD system On Off 7 VIDEO Press repeatedly to cycle through the following video state options which will be indicated on the bottom right hand corner of the display DVD DISC DVD AUX NON DVD and Off no indicator If you select the DVD AUX video source the display will turn off if there is no video signal detected When a video signal is detected on the auxiliary video input and the display is in the DVD AUX video mode the display will automatically turn on 8 Infrared IR Receiver amp Transmitter System sensor which reads the signals from the remote control and sends audio signals to the infrared IR wireless headphones 9 LCD screen The eight inch diagonal screen rotates down to view and up into housing to store when not in use Ensure that the screen is latched into the housing when being stored 10 Volume When in Single Play press to increase A or decrease Vv the volume over all speakers WY When in Dual Play press to increase VOLUME A or decrease Vv the volume for the wired headphones Wireless headphone volume is controlled with the rotary dial on the right ear piece 11 A d4_ Head
175. deployment greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the airbag WARNING This vehicle has special energy management safety belts for the driver and right front passenger These particular belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help reduce the risk of injury in a collision The energy management safety belt is designed to give or release additional belt webbing in some accidents to reduce concentration of force on an occupant s chest and reduce the risk of certain bone fractures and injuries to underlying organs In a crash if the airbag is turned OFF this energy management safety belt might permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to incur a serious or fatal injury The more severe the crash and the heavier the occupant the greater the risk is Be sure the airbag is turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactivation criteria SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags 201 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Important child restraint precautions WARNING Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for thei
176. ditioning system with heated mirrors e Manual heating and air conditioning system with heated mirrors and heated seats 1 Fan speed adjustment Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle 81 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Climate Controls 2 Temperature selection Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle 3 Air flow selections Controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle See the following for a brief description on each control MAX A C Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel vents only to cool the vehicle This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient Recirculated air may also help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle 74 Distributes air through the instrument panel vents lt A Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and the floor vents O OFF Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate lt A Distributes air through the floor vents T Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and floor vents WW Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents Can be used to clear ice or fog from the windshield 4 O Recirculated air Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in cabin Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching t
177. does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Care and service of the DVD player Environmental extremes DVD players which are subjected to harsh environmental conditions may be damaged or perform at less than maximum capability To avoid these outcomes whenever possible avoid exposing your DVD player to e extremely hot or cold temperatures direct sunlight high humidity a dusty environment locations where strong magnetic fields are generated Temperature extremes When the vehicle is parked under direct sunlight or in an extremely cold place for a long period of time wait until the cabin temperature of the vehicle is at normal temperature before operating the system Humidity and moisture condensation Moisture in the air will condense in the DVD player under extremely humid conditions or when moving from a cold place to a warm one Moisture condensation may cause damage to the DVD and or player If moisture condensation occurs do not insert a CD or DVD into the player If one is already in the player remove it Turn the DVD player ON to dry the moisture before inserting a DVD This could take an hour or more Foreign substances Exercise care to prevent dirt and foreign objects from entering the DVD player compartment Be especially careful not to spill
178. ds 4 8 seconds The driver s safety belt is buckled The safety belt warning light and while the indicator light is warning chime turn off illuminated and the warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is buckled The safety belt warning light and before the ignition switch is turned indicator chime remain off to the on position Belt Minder The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function This feature provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster The driver s safety belt is not The Belt Minder feature is buckled before the vehicle has activated the safety belt warning reached at least 3 mph 5 km h light illuminates and the warning and 1 2 minutes have elapsed chime sounds for 6 seconds every since the ignition switch has been 30 seconds repeating for turned to the on position approximately 5 minutes or until safety belt is buckled The driver s safety belt is buckled The Belt Minder feature will not while the safety belt indicator light activate is illuminated and the safety belt warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is buckled The Belt Minder feature will not before the ignition switch is turned activate to the on position 188 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 O
179. duct incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U S patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited MP3 Supply of this product only conveys a license for private non commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial i e revenue generating real time broadcasting terrestrial satellite cable and or any other media broadcasting streaming via internet intranets and or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems such as pay audio or audio on demand applications An independent license for such use is required For details please visit http www mp3licensing com Safety information WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Read all of the safety
180. e 1 3H pr aac aad aide as g OK WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay which allows you to operate the window switches and audio for up to ten minutes after the ignition has turned off or until either front door has opened 1 V Tune Disc selector In radio mode press to manually go up A or down Vv the radio frequency Press and hold for a fast advance through radio frequencies In menu mode use to select various settings In CD MP3 mode press to select the desired disc 35 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 2 Phone If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC press to E access SYNC PHONE features For further information please refer to supplemental information on SYNC included with your vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC the display will read NO PHONE
181. e inflated to the manufacturer s recommended tire pressure Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF your tire pressure still needs to be checked Visit www checkmytires org for additional information When your temporary spare tire is installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System have the damaged road wheel tire repaired and remounted on your vehicle For additional information refer to Changing tires with TPMS in this section When you believe your system is not operating properly The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you when your tires need air It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended Please refer to the following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring System 246 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Low Tire Pressure Warning Light Solid Warning Light Tires Wheels and Loading Possible cause Tire s under inflated Spare tire in use TPMS malfunction Tire rotation without sensor training 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Customer Action Required 1
182. e instructions as in the Conditioning section 365 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Cleaning Conditioning Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner are available at the King Ranch Saddle Shop Visit the Web site at www krsaddleshop com or telephone in the United States 1 800 282 KING 5464 If you are unable to obtain King Ranch Leather Conditioner use another premium leather conditioner e Apply your first conditioning treatment within six months of taking delivery of your vehicle Condition twice yearly in order to replenish lost oils and revitalize the aroma suppleness and resilience of the leather e Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel sized amount of conditioner to a clean dry cloth e Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears Allow the conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior If a film appears wipe off film with a dry clean cloth UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt Note Use care when using a power washer to clean the driveline especially the driveshaft and interfacing components The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage FORD LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your ve
183. e seat cushion The maximum load is 25 lb 11 kg Returning the seat to seating position e Pull lever on the side of the seat to release seat cushion from storage position e Push seat cushion down until it locks into horizontal position WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped underneath the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision To gain access to the cupholders and tray pull down on the armrest 179 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To gain access to the 60 40 load floor store the cushion in the upright locked position Pull up on the straps located at the sides of the load floor and rotate forward until resting on the carpet SAFETY RESTRAINTS Safety restraints precautions WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips WARNING To reduce the risk of injury make sure children sit in the back seat where they can be properly restrained WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including
184. e Close windows for high speed driving EPA fuel economy estimates Every new vehicle should have a window sticker containing EPA fuel economy estimates Contact your authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle The EPA fuel economy estimates should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles Your fuel economy may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM C Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly e Use only the specified fuel listed e Avoid running out of fuel e Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds e Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system If other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability 392 2009 F 250 350 450
185. e Seating and Safety Restraints chapter SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED With speed control set you can maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved Setting speed control The controls for using your speed control are located on the steering wheel for your convenience 1 Press the ON control and release it 2 Accelerate to the desired speed 3 Press the SET control and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal 5 The indicator light 6 on the instrument cluster will turn on Note e Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a steep hill 116 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls e If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill you may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed e If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed on an uphill your speed control will disengage Resuming a set speed Press the RES resume control and release it This will automatically return the vehicle to the previously set speed Increasing speed while using speed control There are two ways to set a higher speed e Press and hold the SET control until you get to the desired speed then release the control You can also use the SET control to o
186. e of the rear wheels is off the ground the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack even if the transmission is in P Park automatic transmission or R Reverse manual transmission To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change the tire be sure that the parking brake is set and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked 332 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies WARNING To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure the parking brake is set then block in both directions the wheel that is diagonally opposite other side and end of the vehicle to the tire being changed WARNING If the vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 1 Turn engine off and block the wheel that is diagonally opposite of Q _ the flat tire using the wheel chock T if equipped If the vehicle is a DA a Z 4x4 lock the manual hub on the wheel 2 Remove the jack jack handle lug wrench and spare tire from the stowage locations 3 Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim 4 Loosen each wheel lug nut one half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until
187. e should be inspected by an authorized dealer Refer to Brake system warning light in the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the brake system warning light BRAKE Four wheel anti lock brake system ABS if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with an Anti lock Braking System ABS This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking The ABS operates by detecting the onset of wheel lockup during brake application and compensates for this tendency Noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking any pulsation or mechanical noise you may feel or hear is normal In addition the ABS performs a self check after you start the engine and begin to drive away A brief mechanical noise may be heard during this test This is normal 279 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving ABS warning lamp The ABS lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned on If the light does not illuminate during start up remains on or flashes the ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced Even when the ABS is disabled normal braking is still effective If your BRAKE warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake B RAKE released have your brake system serviced immediately by an authorized dealer Using ABS When hard braking is required apply continuous f
188. e soon The Service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Normally the Service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present However if after 15 seconds the Service engine soon light blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing See the Readiness for Inspection Maintenance Q M testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board Diagnostics System OBD II has detected a malfunction Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in the Maintenance and Specifications 15 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster chapter If the light is blinking engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your authorized dealer WARNING Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter the fuel system interior floor coverings or other vehicle components possibly causing a fire Brake system warning light To confirm the brake system warning P light is functional it wi
189. e that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device such as ladder racks or pickup box cover Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty increase your repair cost reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to heavy off road usage 309 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving VEHICLE USED AS A STATIONARY POWER SOURCE Auxiliary equipment called power take off or PTO is often added to the engine or transmission to operate utility equipment Examples include a wheel lift for tow trucks cranes tools for construction or tire service and pumping fluids PTO applications draw auxiliary horsepower from the powertrain often while the vehicle is stationary In this condition there is limited cooling air flow through the radiator and around the vehicle that normally occurs when a vehicle is moving The aftermarket PTO system installer having the most knowledge of the final application is responsible for determining whether additional chassis heat protection or powertrain cooling is required and alerting the user to the safe and proper operation Ford Super Dut
190. e windshield To clean these items follow these tips e The windshield rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 available from your authorized dealer 361 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Cleaning e The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate ZC 32 A available from your authorized dealer This washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car wash facilities Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly e Do not use abrasives as they may cause scratches e Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clean any parts INSTRUMENT PANEL INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS EXCEPT HARLEY DAVIDSON Clean the instrument panel interior trim areas and cluster lens with a clean and damp white cotton cloth then with a clean and dry white cotton cloth e Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection e Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to a
191. ear slider window if equipped WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves WARNING When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the window openings If your vehicle is equipped with a power rear slide window the switch is located on the instrument panel behind the right hand side of the 4 steering wheel e Press the right side of the control to open the window ee e Pull the right side of the control REAR WINDOW to close the window Accessory delay With accessory delay the window switches may be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the off position or until either front door is opened INTERIOR MIRROR The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm which lets you adjust the mirror UP or DOWN and from SIDE to SIDE WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with an interior rear view mirror which has an auto dimming function The electronic day night mirror will change from the normal high reflective state to the non glare darkened state when bright lights glare reach the mirror When the mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle it will au
192. ection apply to vehicles equipped with gasoline engines for vehicles equipped with diesel engines refer to your Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement 261 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Your vehicle may tow a Conventional Class IV trailer or fifth wheel trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts To calculate your maximum trailer weight For pickup trucks Take curb weight hitch hardware and the driver s weight then subtract them from the GCWR listed for your vehicle series engine transmission and drive axle ratio refer to the chart table in the following text This calculation will give you the maximum trailer weight possible for your vehicle For chassis cabs and pickup trucks with aftermarket equipment Weigh your vehicle at a certified scale and subtract this actual curb weight hitch hardware and the driver s weight from the GCWR listed for your vehicle series engine transmission and drive axle ratio refer to the chart table in the following text This calculation will give you the maximum trailer weight possible for your vehicle The weight of all additional cargo and passengers must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight calculated above Further trailer hitch restrictions and limitations exi
193. eel drive mode WARNING Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal injury or property damage The occurrence of a Traction Control event is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this may lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If you experience a severe road event SLOW DOWN The Traction Control switch located on the instrument panel to the left of the climate control system has an indicator light that illuminates when the system is off The Traction Control system will automatically turn on every time the ignition is turned off and on The Traction Control system should normally be left on If you should become stuck in snow or ice or on a very slippery road surface try switching the Traction Control system off This may allow excess wheel spin to dig the vehicle out and enable a successful rocking maneuver If a system fault is detected the traction control active light will illuminate the Traction Control button will not turn the system on or off and your vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer STEERING To help prevent damage to the power steering system e Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points until it stops for more than three to five seconds when the engine is
194. efficiency Engages automatically in AUTO G7 defrost and GA floor defrost 6 Manual override controls Press this control to manually select where you want the airflow directed To return to full automatic control press AUTO 7 YA Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and floor vents 8 A Distributes air through the floor vents 9 J Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and the floor vents 10 W Distributes air through the instrument panel vents 11 Fan speed control Press to manually increase or decrease the fan speed To return to automatic fan operation press AUTO 12 EXT Press to display outside temperature Press again to display cabin temperature settings 13 OFF Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate 14 Driver temperature control Press to increase decrease the driver side temperature in the vehicle cabin 15 AUTO To engage automatic temperature control press AUTO and select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system will automatically determine fan speed airflow location A C on or off and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the desired temperature 16 4 Heated seat controls Press to turn the heated seats on and off The heated seats turn off when the ignition is turned off 86 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Climate Controls Operating tips e T
195. egardless of the rear axle lubricant used do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles 800 km of a new vehicle and that the first 500 miles of towing be done at no faster than 70 mph 113 km h with no full throttle starts When turning make wide turns to allow trailer tires to properly clear any obstacles Be prepared for trailer sway due to buffeting when larger vehicles pass in either direction Loading Keep the center of gravity low for best handling Trailer loads should be evenly distributed front to back and left to right The load distribution within the trailer should be such that 10 15 of the trailer weight is on the hitch 15 25 for fifth wheel or gooseneck towing Never exceed truck trailer receiver ball tongue tire or coupler loading recommendations Braking The trailer brakes must be inspected and serviced at intervals specified by the manufacturer This includes the shoes drum and trailer brake magnets Electric brakes also require periodic adjustment to keep the shoes properly spaced If the brakes get hot when driving or if they will not hold chances are that they need adjustment Anticipate the need to stop allow much more distance and time to stop than normal Do not apply the trailer brakes for extended periods of time as they can overheat and lose effectiveness Backing up Practice backing up particularly if you are a novice Turn the steering wheel to the right to move the trailer
196. elationship Center In order to help you serve you better please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Your telephone number home and business e The name of the authorized dealer and city where located e The vehicle s current odometer reading In some states you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states 351 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Customer Assistance In the United States a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the extent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws IN CALIFORNIA U S ONLY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and re
197. elief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly 380 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by following these steps 1 Before you begin turn the engine off and let it cool 2 When the engine is cool wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir a translucent plastic bottle Slowly turn cap counterclockwise left until pressure begins to release 3 Step back while the pressure releases 4 When you are sure that all the pressure has been released use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap 5 Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture to within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full 6 Replace the cap Turn until tightly installed Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss After any coolant has been added check the coolant concentration refer to Checking engine coolant If the concentration is not 50 50 protection to 34 F 36 C drain some coolant and adjust the concentration It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50 50 coolant concentration
198. elt Minder feature if it is currently enabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds e This will enable the Belt Minder feature if it is currently disabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by 3 seconds with the light off then followed by the safety belt warning light flashing 4 times per second for 3 seconds again 5 After receiving confirmation the deactivation activation procedure is complete Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt is too short when fully extended there is an 8 inch 20 cm safety belt extension assembly that can be added part number 611C22 This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer 191 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended fp WARNING Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM SRS Important SRS precautions The SRS is designed to work with the safety belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries Airbags D
199. ement N Neutral Only used when towing the vehicle 4L 4x4 Low For low speed off road applications that require extra power such as steep grades deep sand or pulling a boat out of the water Sends power to front and rear wheels This mode is not intended for use on dry pavement Shifting from 2H 2WD to 4H 4x4 High Engage the locking hubs by rotating the hub lock control from FREE to LOCK then move the transfer case lever from 2H 2WD to 4H 4x4 High at a stop or a vehicle speed below 5 mph 8 km h e For proper operation make sure that both indicator arrows on the hub are aligned and that both hubs are set to LOCK e Do not shift into 4H 4x4 High with the rear wheels 2H slipping H 298 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving Shifting from 4H 4x4 High to 2H 2WD Move the transfer case lever to 2H 2WD at a stop or a vehicle speed H A below 5 mph 8 km h 4H With the vehicle at complete stop N disengage the locking hubs optional by rotating the hub lock 4AL control from LOCK to FREE e For proper operation make sure that both indicator arrows on the hub are aligned and that both hubs are set to FREE Shifting from 4H 4x4 High to 4L 4x4 Low 1 Bring the vehicle to a stop or a speed below 5 mph 8 km h 2 Place the gearshift lever in N Neutral If the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission also depress the clutch
200. ence throughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used 233 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall
201. ended to run the A C in the MAX A C position reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting and put the vehicle s transmission into the PARK gear position automatic transmission only to continue to receive cool air from your A C system For maximum cooling performance in MAX A C mode 1 Move the temperature control to the coolest setting 2 Set the fan to the highest speed initially then adjust in order to maintain comfort To aid in side window defogging and demisting in cold weather 1 Select 2 Select A C 3 Set the temperature control to maintain comfort 4 Set the fan speed to highest setting 5 Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows 83 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Climate Controls DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL DATC SYSTEMS IF EQUIPPED e DATC ot Oe 84 Climate Controls e DATC with heated seats and heated mirrors ew eens oe DUAL PIRIL Temperature conversion To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius refer to Units English Metric under either Standard Message Center or Optional Message Center in the Driver Controls chapter In order to achieve maximum cooling performance press W A C and set the temperature to 60 F 16 C and the highest blower setting 1 GW Defrost Distributes outside air t
202. ends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle Gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter should be used when available Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter Cleaner air Ford endorses the use of reformulated cleaner burning gasolines to improve air quality per the recommendations in the Choosing the right fuel section Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components 388 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications If you have run out of fuel e You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal Normally adding 1 gallon 3 8L of fuel is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade more than 1 gallon 8 8L may be required e The Service engine soon C indicator may come on For more information on the Service engine soon C indicator refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you the driver You must gather information as accur
203. engine has defaulted to a limp home operation or when a 17 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster transmission problem has been detected and shifting may be restricted If the light remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Traction Control RTT Cif equipped Displays when the Traction Control system is active If the light remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Refer to Traction Control in the Driving chapter for more information Check fuel cap RTT Displays when the fuel cap may not be properly installed Continued driving with this light on may cause the Service engine soon warning light to come on Refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Engine coolant temperature RTT Displays when the engine coolant temperature is high Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let it cool Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot Low fuel RTT Displays when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at or near empty refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter Door ajar RTT Displays when the ignition is in the on position and any door is open 18 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2
204. er WO Te moves and stays outside the normal operating range have the vehicle s electrical system checked as soon as possible Transmission fluid temperature gauge automatic transmission only If the gauge is in the Normal area normal the transmission fluid is within the J normal operating temperature between H and C 0 H 24 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Yellow area warning the transmission fluid is higher than normal operating temperature This can be caused by special operation conditions i e snowplowing towing or off road use Refer to Special Operating Conditions in the scheduled maintenance information for instructions Operating the transmission for extended periods of time with the gauge in the yellow area may cause internal transmission damage Altering the severity of the driving conditions is recommended to lower the transmission temperature into the normal range Red area over temperature the transmission fluid is overheating Stop the vehicle to allow the temperature to return to normal range If the gauge is operating in the Yellow or Red area stop the vehicle and verify the airflow is not restricted such as snow or debris blocking airflow through the grill If the gauge continues to show high temperatures see your authorized dealer 25 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing
205. er inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction indicator after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 244 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference
206. er than two wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations it won t stop any faster than two wheel drive vehicles Always drive at a safe speed How your vehicle differs from other vehicles SUV and trucks can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways Your vehicle may be e Higher to allow higher load carrying capacity and to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components Shorter to give it the capability to approach inclines and drive over the crest of a hill without getting hung up or damaging underbody components All other things held equal a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase 225 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Narrower to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces particularly in off road use As a result of the above dimensional differences SUV s and trucks often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires The Quality grades can be fo
207. es Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of time open the windows at least one inch 2 5 cm or adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in fresh air ENGINE BLOCK HEATER An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting and allows the heater defroster system to respond quickly If your vehicle is equipped with this system your equipment includes a heater element which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt a c electrical source The block heater system is most effective when outdoor temperatures reach below 0 F 18 C WARNING Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or physical harm WARNING To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters 277 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving Prior to using the engine block heater follow these recommendations for proper and safe operation e For your safety use an outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter s laboratory UL
208. eteeeteeteees 30 Clutch HE ALCL hors E A EE xs cee 397 operation while driving 288 recommended shift speeds 289 Compass electronic set zone adjustment 143 CONSOLE sickiccacaxestcestesncaneevaateenveene 106 overhead ccce 105 Controls POWET SCat earecni raatna 174 steering column ccceeeeeee 118 Coolant checking and adding 378 refill capacities 382 405 Cruise control see Speed control 116 Customer Assistance 314 Ford accessories for your vence eaae a Ea 366 Ford Extended Service Pla anena e ee OR 354 Getting assistance outside the U S and Canada 355 Getting roadside assistance 314 Getting the service you MOCO A E vases casas ek 350 Ordering additional owner s literature ceccceeceeeetseeeeeeees 356 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Utilizing the Mediation Arbitration PRO STAIMN 5 ciscxcacsesesonsvexciseosaemtents 354 D Daytime running lamps see Lamps isicccssecacsncesereaecvens 90 Dipstick automatic transmission FIG EPEE EE E 397 ENEMNE OIl ays aeesscssdidecavesseacerdsiaee 373 Driving under special conditions sisesissonn 288 304 307 SANG EERE E REN ATEA S 306 SHOW ANC ice persursonissisir 308 through water ssceresirs 306 310 DVD Syste erreian 51 E Electronic message CONLE cremet nani 127 137 Emergencies roadside jump star
209. ext channels In TEXT MODE press lt Q SEEK SEEK gt to view the previous additional display text In CATEGORY MODE press lt Q SEEK SEEK P gt to select a category Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 6 P 1 OK Play Pause This control is operational in CD MP3 ES mode When a CD MP3 is playing press to pause or play the current CD The CD status will display in the radio display OK Use in various menu selections If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES please refer to the DVD supplement for further information 39 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 7 SHUFFLE In CD MP3 mode aA press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle mode SHUFFLE ON will appear in the display If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away press SEEK to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing CD SHUF will appear in the display To disengage press SHUFFLE again SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display Note In track mode all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in random order In MP3 folder mode the system will randomly play all tracks within the current folder 8 FOLDER In folder mode press FOLDER gt to access next folder on MP3 discs if available 9 lt q FOLDER In folder mode ea press lt
210. ey cannot access radio sources Audio displays Your DVD system interacts closely with the front audio system Status messages will appear in the radio display showing the DVD status Some possible radio display messages e SINGLE PLAY or DUAL PLAY e DVD LOAD e DVD MENU e DVD STOP Audio interaction You can then also use the front audio controls to advance reverse play and pause a DVD While a DVD is playing you may use the following controls on the front radio e SEEK Press to advance to the previous lt q or next gt DVD chapters 74 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems e Il Press to play a DVD or to pause the DVD When the radio displays DVD MENU press PLAY on the radio memory preset 6 to play the disc Parental control for the DVD system Your Family Entertainment System FES allows you to have control over the rear seat controls in a few different ways The DVD system is automatically activated when the vehicle ignition is ON which allows the rear seat passengers to use the DVD system There are three levels of control of the FES buttons The states are OOWIOWWOC FULL enabled LOCAL or LOCKED disabled To change the level of control press the memory preset controls 3 and 5 simultaneously on the front audio controls The control level will cycle each time the buttons are pressed simultaneously The three states are described
211. f injury or ejection Study your Owner s Guide and any supplements for specific information about equipment features instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS AWD and AWD Systems if equipped A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD when selected has the ability to use all four wheels to power itself This increases traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot 224 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power transfer unit 4WD vehicles allow you to select different drive modes as necessary Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be found in the Driving chapter Information on transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle On some 4WD models the initial shift from two wheel drive to 4WD while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to speed and is not cause for concern WARNING Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD and AWD vehicles Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may accelerate bett
212. f position and all vehicle doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 1 Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the on position 2 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 3 Turn the ignition from the on position to the off position 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the on position The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 6 To enable disable the autounlock feature press the lock control then press the unlock control The horn will chirp once if autounlock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autounlock was activated 7 Turn the ignition to the off position The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete Keyless entry keypad autounlock enable disable procedure 1 Turn the ignition to the off position 2 Close all the doors e3 Be G6 Ce b 3 Enter factory set 5 digit entry code 4 Press and hold the 3 e 4 While holding the 3 e 4 press and release the 7 e 8 While still holding the 3 e 4 press and release the 7 e 8a second time 5 Release the 3 e 4 The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by
213. f procedure from one fill up to another e Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0 1 gallon liter 1 Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles 8 km with the speed control system engaged to display a stabilized average 2 Record the highway fuel economy for future reference It is important to press the RESET control after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings Drive timer Elapsed travel timer Select this function from the INFO menu to display a timer XX XX XX To operate the Trip Elapsed Drive 0 0 mi Time perform the following 1 Press and release RESET in order to start the timer 2 Press and release RESET to pause the timer 3 Press and hold RESET for two seconds in order to reset the timer 139 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls Setup menu Press this control for the following displays e System check e Units English Metric e Autolamp timer presets if equipped Autolock On Off Gf equipped Compass display e Compass zone calibration adjustment e Language e Reset to English if in another language see Note below Note When returning to the SETUP menu and a non English HOLD RESET FOR language has been selected HOLD r RESET FOR ENGLISH will be ENGLISH displayed to change back to English Press and hold the RESET control to change back to English System check Selecting this fun
214. f the assisting battery 344 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the assisting battery 4 Make the final connection of the negative cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle s engine away from the battery and the carburetor fuel injection system Do not use fuel lines engine rocker covers or the intake manifold as grownding points WARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative terminal of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery 5 Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades belts moving parts of both engines or any fuel delivery system parts 345 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Jump starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed 2 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle 3 Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables Removing the jumper cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected 1 Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface Note In the illustrations lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting boosting battery
215. f this occurs the leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining Cleaning For dirt use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean damp cloth or soft brush For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution the leather may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product Tanners Preserve Leather Cleaner and a 3M Type T scrubbing pad e Clean spills as quickly as possible e Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather as cleaners may darken the leather For more specific cleaning information contact the King Ranch Saddle Shop at 1 800 282 KING 5464 Do not spill coffee ketchup mustard orange juice or oil based products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl or plastics Scratches Natural Markings Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine steer hides there will be evidence of naturally occurring markings such as small scars These markings give character to the seating covers and should be considered as proof of a genuine leather product In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear marks apply conditioner on the affected area following the sam
216. f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Octane recommendations Your vehicle is designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump R M 2 octane rating of 87 We do not recommend the use of gasolines labeled as Regular in high altitude areas that are sold with octane ratings less than 87 Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage Fuel quality If you are experiencing starting rough idle or hesitation driveability problems try a different brand of unleaded gasoline Premium unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to become more pronounced If the problems persist see your authorized dealer Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating These products have not been approved for your engine and could cause damage to the fuel system Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty Many of the world s automakers approved the World Wide Fuel Charter that recomm
217. f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Push control to lower head restraint WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and or operate the vehicle until the head restraint is placed in its proper position The driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion Cabela s seat If your vehicle is equipped with a Cabela s seat you will not have the load floor option A lockable stowage box is located under the rear seat For more information on the stowage box see Center console under seat storage Cabela s edition in the Driver controls chapter Rear folding seat system with load floor if equipped The rear seatback has a split 60 40 seat Each seat cushion can be flipped up into the seatback position Note The Crew Cab rear 60 40 split bench seatback is not intended to support a cargo load in the forward folded position To fold the seatback down pull down the latch lever located on the bottom seatback to fold the seatback forward 178 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To flip the seat cushion up pull up on the lever located on the side of the seat cushion to rotate the cushion up until it locks into a vertical storage position gaining access to the grocery hook located on the underside of the driver sid
218. factory set 5 digit entry code 4 Press and hold the 3 e 4 While holding the 3 e 4 press the 7 e 8 5 Release the 7 e 8 6 Release the 3 e 4 The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled 1 2 8 4 5 8 7 8 e9 Autounlock feature if equipped The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when e the ignition is in the on position all the doors are closed and the vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the off or accessory position and the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being transitioned to the off or accessory position Note The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been electronically locked before the driver door is opened Deactivating activating autounlock feature There are three methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer e by using a power door unlock lock sequence 157 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Locks and Security e using a keypad procedure if equipped Note The autounlock feature can be activated deactivated independently of the autolock feature Power door lock switch autounlock enable disable procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is in the of
219. ff the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Notice to owners of diesel powered vehicles Read the 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for information regarding correct operation and maintenance of your Diesel powered light truck Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles Before you drive your vehicle please read this Owner s Guide carefully Your vehicle is not a passenger car As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury or death 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Introduction Using your vehicle with a snowplow For more information and guidelines for using your vehicle with a snowplow refer to the Driving chapter Using your vehicle as an ambulance If your light truck is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package it may be utilized as an ambulance Ford urges ambulance manufacturers to follow the recommendations of the Ford Incomplete Vehicle Manual Ford Truck Body Builder s Layout Book and the Qualified Vehicle Modifiers QVM Guidelines as well as pertinent supple
220. figurations the following preparations are met e On Electronic Shift On the Fly ESOF vehicles the 4x4 control is turned to the 2WD position prior to towing e On manual shift transfer case vehicles the front wheel hub locks are in the FREE position prior to towing 348 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Note Towing an ESOF 4x4 vehicle with the front wheels on the ground without disengaging the front hubs may cause damage to the automatic transmission Note Towing a 4x2 or an ESOF 4x4 vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground for more than 50 miles 80 km and or in excess of 35 mph 56 km h may cause damage to the automatic transmission Note On Dual Rear Wheel DRW vehicles an outer rear wheel must be removed prior to using a wheel lift wrecker Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook up and towing procedures for your vehicle If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly vehicle damage may occur Emergency towing In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle without access to wheel dollies car hauling trailer or flatbed transport vehicle your vehicle regardless of transmission powertrain configuration can be flat towed all wheels on the ground under the following conditions e Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being
221. for the previous chapter Press PLAY to resume normal playback speed and volume In CD MP3 mode press to access the previous track 19 MENU Press to access the DVD disc menu for selections Press MENU again when in the DVD disc menu to access the system set up menu 20 SUBTITLE DVD dependent Press to turn the subtitle feature ON or OFF 21 LANGUAGE DVD dependent Press to select the desired language 22 ENTER Press to select the highlighted menu option 23 ILLUMINATION Press to illuminate the remote control and backlight all of the buttons 60 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Battery replacement mie Y Batteries are supplied with the remote control unit Since all batteries have a limited shelf life replace them when the unit fails to control the DVD player Remove the screw and unlatch the battery cover to access the batteries The remote control unit uses two AAA batteries which are supplied with the unit 61 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Headphones Wireless headphones WARNING The driver should never use the headphones while driving the vehicle Using headphones may prevent the driver from hearing audible warnings such as horns or emergency sirens which could result in a crash causing serious injury Give your full attention to driving and to the road Your FES sy
222. four seconds The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no more warning messages This allows you to use the full functionality of the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the SELECT RESET button and clearing the warning message Warning messages that have been reset are divided into two categories e They will reappear on the display 10 minutes from the reset e They will not reappear until an ignition off on cycle has been completed This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within the vehicle Warning returns after 10 minutes if condition still exists Warning returns after the ignition key is turned from off to on Trailer brake module fault if equipped Trailer disconnected if equipped Brake fluid level low Wiring fault on trailer if equipped 132 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls Warning can be cleared by pressing the RESET button Warning can reappear if the condition is still present Warning will reappear on the Tire sensor fault if equipped next ignition key cycle if the condition only Drain water separator diesel engine only Stop safely now diesel engine only Engine warming please wait xx diesel engine only OK to drive diesel engine only Engine turns off in xx diesel engine only Engine turned off diesel engine only Drive to clean exhaust fi
223. g If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms REARVIEW CAMERA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The rear view camera system located on the tailgate provides a video image which appears in the rear view mirror or on the navigation screen if equipped of the area behind the vehicle It adds assistance to the driver while reversing or reverse parking the vehicle To use the camera system place the transmission in R Reverse an VA l image will display on the left portion of the rear view mirror or on the NG navigation screen if equipped The G area displayed on the screen may ND vary according to the vehicle l orientation and or road condition e 1 Rear bumper 2 Red zone 38 Yellow zone 4 Green zone 5 Centerline of vehicle Always use caution while backing 293 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones Use the side mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle When shifting out of R Reverse and into any other gear the image will rema
224. g chart 239 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law a REET po NT 8 mph 40 kv OE po QT 99 mph 159 rw OEO pS mph 80 ern po 12 mph 200 kro l pV 49 mph 240 kro Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR 8 U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall 9 M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT All Terrain or AS All Season 10 Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also m
225. g either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into the system Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level 5 Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1 2 the volume 6 Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE LINE IN or SYNC LINE IN appears in the display You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may be low 7 Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls 43 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Troubleshooting 1 Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output Line level outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not compatible with the AIJ The AIJ will only work correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a volume control 2 Do not set the portable music player s volume level higher than is necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality Many portable music players have different output levels so not all players should be set at the same levels Some players will sound best at full volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume 3 If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels turn the portable music player volume down If the problems persist re
226. g lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer 4WD Systems 4WD when you select a 4WD mode uses all four wheels to power the vehicle This increases traction enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot 305 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case On 4WD vehicles the transfer case allows you to select 4WD when necessary Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be found in the Driving chapter Information on transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle Normal characteristics On some 4WD models the initial shift from two wheel drive to 4x4 while the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern Sand When driving over sand try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause t
227. g on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the additional weight of the child is added to the child restraint It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to the vehicle Sometimes a slight lean towards the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt 6 Attach the tether strap if the child seat is equipped Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter 212 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 7 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward There should be no more than one inch 2 5 cm of movement for proper installation 8 Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST to make certain the child restraint is properly installed Installing child safety seats in the front row lap belt seating positions Super Cab and Crew Cab WARNING Installing a child safety seat in the front row lap seating position should be avoided if at all possible WARNING Never place a rear facing child seat in the front center seating position of a vehicle with
228. g with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine 22 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Standard instrument cluster Harley Davidson instrument cluster Engine hour meter if equipped Registers the accumulated time the engine has been running Press and release the message center INFO button until this is displayed Engine oil pressure gauge Indicates engine oil pressure The needle should stay in the normal operating range between L and H If the needle falls below the normal range stop the vehicle turn off the engine and check the engine oil level Add oil if needed If the oil Instrument Cluster ENG HRS XXXX X 0 0 mi level is correct have your vehicle checked at your authorized dealer 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus 23 Instrument Cluster Fuel gauge Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the on position The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the Va vehicle is in motion or on a grade The FUEL icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information Battery voltage gauge manual transmission only Indicates the battery voltage when the ignition is CLN in the on position If the point
229. gine only Displayed when the water separator has reached a predetermined capacity and needs to be drained Refer to your 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for more information STOP SAFELY NOW Diesel engine only Displays and a chime sounds when the vehicle exhaust system temperature exceeds intended operating range If this warning occurs the engine power is reduced and the engine will shutdown when the vehicle speed is below 3 mph 5 km h Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and contact your authorized dealer Depending on the severity of the over temperature condition the vehicle may or may not restart after cycling the ignition off If the vehicle restarts there may be limited power or there could be full function If the exhaust over temperature condition reoccurs the message center will display STOP SAFELY NOW the chime will sound the engine power will be reduced again and shut down below 3 mph 5km h ENGINE TURNS OFF IN XX Diesel engine only Displayed when the vehicle is in the final 30 seconds of a countdown to where the engine will intentionally be turned off by the PCM The diesel engine shutdown is a Regulatory requirement which may be required of a particular diesel vehicle for sale in States requiring this feature ENGINE TURNED OFF Diesel engine only Displayed after the 30 second countdown ENGINE WARMING PLEASE WAIT XX Diesel engine onl
230. gine soon indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are apparent continued driving with the Service engine soon C indicator on can result in increased emissions lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Some state provincial and local governments may have Inspection Maintenance I M programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Your vehicle may not pass the I M test if the Service engine soon C indicator is on or not working properly bulb is burned out or if the OBD II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked In this case the vehicle is considered not ready for I M testing If the Service engine soon Cc indicator is on or the bulb does not work the vehicle may need to be serviced Refer to the On board diagnostics OBD II description in this chapter If the vehicle s engine or transmission has just been serviced or the battery has recently run down or been replaced the OBD II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing To determine if the vehicle is ready for I M testing turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 second
231. h For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution In Canada use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner CXC 93 Dry the area with a soft cloth If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution the leather may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl and plastics or oil petroleum based leather conditioners These products may cause premature wearing of the clear protective coating on the seat Note In some instances color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery If this occurs the leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining 364 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Cleaning LEATHER SEATS FOR THE KING RANCH F 250 AND F 350 CREW CAB ONLY IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium top grain leather which is extremely durable but still requires special care and maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the leather Failure to care for the leather can result in drying out and fading of the material Note In some instances color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery I
232. he INFO menu estimates approximately XXX FILES TOE how far you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel The DTE function will display FUEL LEVEL LOW and sound a tone for one second when you have approximately 50 miles 80 km to empty If you RESET this warning message this display and tone will return within 10 minutes 0 0 mi DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles 800 km This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display The running average fuel economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected 138 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls Average fuel economy AFE Select this function from the INFO menu to display your average fuel XXX FPG economy in miles gallon or liters 100 km 0 0 mi If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing miles traveled since last fill up by gallons of fuel used multiply liters used by 100 then divide by kilometers traveled your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons e Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill up e Differences in the automatic shut off points on the fuel pumps at service stations e Variations in top of
233. he 1 off position in order to remove the first coded key from the ignition 3 Within 10 seconds of removing the first coded key insert the second previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition from the 1 off position to the 3 on position maintain ignition in the 3 on position for at least one second but no more than 10 seconds 4 Turn the ignition from the 3 on position back to the 1 off position in order to remove the second coded key from the ignition 5 Within 10 seconds of removing the second coded Key insert the new unprogrammed key new key valet key into the ignition and turn the ignition from the 1 off position to the 3 on position maintain ignition in the 3 on position for at least one second but no more than 10 seconds This step will program your new key to a coded key 6 To program additional new unprogrammed key s repeat Steps 1 through 5 If successful the new coded key s will start the vehicle s engine and the theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out 169 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Locks and Security If not successful the new coded key s will not start the vehicle s engine and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat Steps 1 through 5 If failure repeats bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new spare key s programmed PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM IF E
234. he 7 e 8 and the 9 e 0 at the same time You do not need to enter the keypad code first Note The interior lamps will turn off SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI THEFT SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED SecuriLock passive anti theft system is an engine immobilization system This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a no start condition Your vehicle comes with two coded keys additional coded keys may be purchased from your authorized dealer The authorized dealer can program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys yourself Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded key Note The SecuriLock passive anti theft system is not compatible with non Ford aftermarket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Note Large metallic objects electronic devices that are used to purchase gasoline or similar items or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues You need to prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine These objects will not cause damage to the coded key but may cause a momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the engine If a problem occurs turn the ignition off remove all objects on the key chain awa
235. he FES and is labeled A A Headphones plugged into this headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be the Channel A source The wired headphone jack for Channel B is located on the right side of the FES and is labeled B Headphones plugged into this headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be the Channel B source Adjust the headphone volume using the volume control on the DVD system VOLUME Operation Single play Dual play Your DVD and audio system work together with the infrared headphones and wired headphones not included to allow the rear seat passengers to listen to the radio and other media sources over the headphones This enables the front and rear seat passengers to listen to a variety of sources a variety of ways 65 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Single Play Single play consists of all occupants in the vehicle listening to the same playing media over the front and rear speakers When the DVD system is on and the same source is playing through the front and rear speakers SINGLE PLAY will appear in the front radio display Dual Play Dual play is when the rear seat passengers choose to listen to a different playing media than the front seat passengers With the DVD and Rear Seat Controls turned ON the rear seat passengers may choose to listen to the radio CD MP3 DVD or DVD AUX media sources over headphones
236. he TBC module The TBC is only a factory or dealer installed item Ford is not responsible for warranty or performance of the TBC due to misuse or customer installation Do not attempt removal of the TBC without consulting the Workshop Manual Damage to the unit may result Trailer lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn signals and hazard lights are working Contact your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps 269 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Driving while you tow When towing a trailer Do not drive faster than 70 mph 113 km h during the first 500 miles 800 km of trailer towing and don t make full throttle starts Turn off the speed control The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer To eliminate excessive transmission shifting activate the Tow Haul feature This will also assist in transmission cooling For additional information refer to Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter Anticipate stops and brake gradually Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary or conventional spare tire If the spare tire is different
237. he crash and the heavier the occupant the greater the risk is Be sure the airbag is turned ON for any person who does not qualify under the NHTSA deactivation criteria Transport Canada deactivation criteria Canada Only 1 Infant An infant less than 1 year old must ride in the front seat because 200 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e my vehicle has no rear seat the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear facing infant seat or the infant has a medical condition which according to the infant s physician makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can monitor the infant s condition 2 Child age 12 or under A child age 12 or under must ride in the front seat because e my vehicle has no rear seat e although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever possible children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient or the child has a medical condition that according to the child s physician makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can monitor the child s condition 3 Medical condition A passenger has a medical condition that according to his or her physician e poses a special risk for the passenger if the airbag deploys and e makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag
238. he interior of the vehicle Recirculation engages automatically with selection of MAX A C or can be engaged manually in any other airflow selection except defrost Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections except MAX A C 5 A C Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Engages automatically in MAX A C WQ and SF 6 E Heated mirrors Press to turn the heated mirrors on and off The heated mirrors turn off automatically after 10 minutes T a Heated seats Press to turn the heated seats on and off The heated seats turn off when the ignition is turned off 82 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Climate Controls Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the G7 position To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the air flow selector in the O OFF position e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the rear seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield e To improve the A C cool down drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been aired out During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for extended periods of time in gear it is recomm
239. he memory buttons for approximately two seconds 4 A tone will be heard when the memory save is complete 176 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To recall a memory position e Press and release either memory 1 button or memory 2 button A position can be recalled e in any gearshift position if the ignition is not in the on position e only in P Park or N Neutral if the ignition is in the on position A memory seat position may be programmed at any time The memory positions are also recalled when you press your remote entry transmitter unlock control Gf the transmitter is programmed to amemory position or when you enter a valid personal entry code that is programmed to a memory position To program the memory feature to a remote entry transmitter and for more information on how to use the keypad refer to Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter REAR SEATS Adjustable head restraints if equipped The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the event of a rear collision To properly adjust your head restraints lift the head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close to that position as possible The head restraints can be moved up and down Lift the head restraint so that it is located directly or as 4 close as possible behind your head a L 177 2009 F 250 350 450 550
240. he vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle Remember you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution Note If air is released from your tires the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS indicator light may illuminate if equipped Mud and water If you must drive through high water drive slowly Traction or brake capability may be limited When driving through water determine the depth avoid water higher than the bottom of the hubs if possible and proceed slowly If the ignition system gets wet the vehicle may stall Once through water always try the brakes Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal 306 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud As when you are driving over sand apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels If the vehicle does slide steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle If the transmission transfer case or front axle are submerged in water their fluids should be checked and changed if necessary Driving through deep water may damage the transmission Refer to Transmission
241. her devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay which allows you to operate the window switches and the audio for up to ten minutes after the ignition has been turned off or until either front door is opened L A V Press A V to manually go up or down the radio frequency Press and hold for a fast advance through radio frequencies 28 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems In satellite radio mode if equipped press A v to tune to the next previous channel Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 2 Phone If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC press to eA access SYNC PHONE features For further information please refer to supplemental information on SYNC included with your vehicle a oe vehicle is not equipped with SYNC the display will read NO 3 MENU Press MENU repeatedly to access to the following settings Setting the clock Press MENU until SET HOUR or SET MINUTES is displayed Use W lt SEEK SEEK to adjust the hours minutes SATELLITE RADIO MENU if equipped Press MENU when satellite radio mode is active to access Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu Press A IV to cycle through the following options
242. hicle and protect its finishes These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications For best results use the following products or products of equivalent quality Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft Car Care Kit ZC 26 Motorcraft Car Wash Canada only CXC 83 Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish ZC 8 A Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant ZC 40 A 366 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Cleaning Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner ZC 38 A Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner U S only ZC 11 A Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser U S only ZC 20 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo Canada only CXC 66 A Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner Canada only CXC 101 Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate U S only ZC 17 B Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 100 Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover U S only ZC 14 Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine ZC 28 Motorcraft Triple Clean U S only ZC 13 Motorcraft Ultr
243. hould replace it as soon as possible with a road tire wheel that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types 1 T type mini spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not e Exceed 50 mph 80 km h e Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label 327 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at cur
244. hrough the windshield defroster and demister vents Can be used to clear thin ice or fog from the windshield To exit G7 select another mode 2 Passenger temperature control Press to increase decrease the passenger side temperature in the vehicle cabin 3A Dual Single dual electric temperature control Allows the driver to have full control of the cabin temperature settings single zone or allows the passenger to have control of their individual temperature settings dual zone control Press to turn on dual zone mode press again to return to single zone 3B Gy Heated mirrors Press to defrost the outside rear view mirrors The heated mirrors will turn off after 10 minutes or can be turned off by pressing the button again Refer to Power mirrors in the Driver Controls chapter for more information 85 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Climate Controls 4 Recirculation control Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in cabin Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculation can be engaged manually in any other airflow selection except KO defrost Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections except MAX A C 5 A C control Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and
245. ic appearance of your vehicle In addition each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford s rigorous engineering and safety specifications Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer installed Genuine Ford Accessories found to be defective in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit e 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km whichever occurs first or e the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories Not all accessories are available for all models For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle please contact your dealer or visit our online store at www fordaccessories com Exterior style Bug shields Chrome exhaust tips Deflectors Running boards Splash guards Step bars Tonneau covers Wheels Interior style Electrochromatic compass temperature interior mirrors Floor mats 412 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Accessories Lifestyle Ash cup smoker s package Bedliners and bedmats Cargo organization and management Towing mirrors Trailer hitches wiring harnesses and accessories Peace of mind Mobile Ea
246. ide curtain or Safety Canopy or the safety belt pretensioners 196 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The S O S Post Crash Alert can be turned off when any one of the following actions are taken by the driver or any other person e pressing the hazard control button e or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles See authorized dealer Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel Passenger airbag ON OFF switch if equipped WARNING An airbag ON OFF switch if equipped may be installed in this vehicle Before driving always look at the face of the switch to be sure the switch is in the proper position in accordance with these instructions and warnings Failure to put the switch in a proper position can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision Turning the passenger airbag off 1 Insert the ignition key turn the switch to OFF position and hold in OFF position while removing the key 2 When the ignition is turned to the ON position the OFF light illuminates briefly momentarily shuts off and then turns back on This indicates that the passenger airbag is deactivated 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus ON PASSENGER AIRBAG yo l o
247. ideo games and video game equipment when used as auxiliary inputs for your Family Entertainment System FES Do not operate video games or video equipment if the power cords and or cables are broken split or damaged Carefully place cords and or cables where they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation of seats and or compartments Disconnect video games and video equipment power cords and or cables when not in use Avoid touching auxiliary input jacks with your fingers Do not blow on them or allow them to get wet or dirty Do not clean any part of the DVD player with benzene paint thinner or any other solvent 77 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Federal Communication Commission FCC Compliance Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln Mercury could void user s authority to operate the equipment This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference and radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment
248. igned to offer protection to an occupant in the center front seating position WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle including frame bumper front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the airbag system increasing the risk of injury Do not modify the front end of the vehicle WARNING Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment may effect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment 193 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Removing the blocker beam without installing snow plow attachment hardware may effect airbag deployment in a crash Do not operate the truck unless either the blocker beam or snow plow attachment hardware is installed on the vehicle Children and airbags For additional important safety information read all information on safety restraints in this guide Children must always be properly restrained Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision WARNING An infant in a rear facing seat faces a high risk of serious or fatal injuries from a deploying passenger airbag Rear facing infant seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats unless the passenger airbag is turned off See Passenger airb
249. imately one minute of not being in use no infrared signal is received the wireless headphones will automatically turn off They will also turn off after two hours of continuous use as a power save feature If this happens simply turn the headphones on again and continue use 64 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Wired headphones WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves WARNING The driver should never use the headphones while driving the vehicle Using headphones may prevent the driver from hearing audible warnings such as horns or emergency sirens which could result in a crash causing serious injury Give your full attention to driving and to the road You may purchase wired headphones for your FES Family Entertainment System Plug them into the 3 5 mm headphone jack s located on the left and right sides of the system Channel A is located on the left side and Channel B is located on the right side These headphones will be active when in Dual Play mode To listen to the audio on wired headphones not included connect the wired headphones into the headphone jacks on the sides of the DVD system The wired headphone jack for Channel A is located on the left side of t
250. imburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18 000 miles 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days not necessarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 352 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Customer Assistance THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUTO LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer If a warranty concern has not been resolved using
251. in on for a few seconds before it shuts off to assist in parking or trailer hookup If equipped with the Navigation system after shifting out of R Reverse and into any gear other than P Park the image will remain until the vehicle speed reaches 5 mph 8 km h only if the rear camera delay feature is on or until any navigation radio button is depressed Note The default setting for the rear camera delay is off Push the Settings button found on the navigation screen if equipped to set the rear camera delay feature to on or off When towing the camera system will only see what is being towed behind the vehicle this might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen The camera lens for the camera system is located on the tailgate near the tailgate handle Keep the lens clean so the video image remains clear and undistorted Clean the lens with a soft lint free cloth and non abrasive cleaner Note If the camera system image is not clear or seems distorted it may be covered with water droplets snow mud or any other substance If this occurs clean the camera lens before using the camera system WARNING The camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the rear view mirror and the side mirrors for maximum coverage WARNING Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumpe
252. ine protection 382 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications What you should know about fail safe cooling if equipped If the engine coolant supply is depleted this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred The fail safe distance depends on ambient temperatures vehicle load and terrain How fail safe cooling works If the engine begins to overheat e The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red hot area e The message center will indicate the engine is overheating e The C3 indicator will illuminate If the engine reaches a preset over temperature condition the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine When this occurs the vehicle will still operate However e The engine power will be limited e The air conditioning system will be disabled Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine will completely shut down causing steering and braking effort to increase Once the engine temperature cools the engine can be re started Take your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine damage When fail safe mode is activated You have limited engine power when in the fail safe mode so drive the vehicle with caution The vehicle will not be able to
253. information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the following website e In the United States www ford com e In Canada www ford ca e In Australia www ford com au e In Mexico www ford com mx Additional owner information is given in separate publications This Owner s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle Furthermore due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available Remember to pass on this Owner s Guide when reselling the vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle WARNING Fuel pump shut off switch In the event of an accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration e g collision when parking To reset the switch refer to the Fuel pump shut off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Introduction SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION A Warning symbols in this guide How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others In this guide answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning triangle symbol These comments should be read and observed A Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of
254. ing an inboard rear tire on dual rear wheel vehicles the valve stem must be facing outward If replacing the outboard wheel the valve stem must be facing inward Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered 10 Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise Go to step 19 335 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies The following steps apply to F 350 Dual Rear Wheel DRW and F 450 F 550 vehicles only 11 Slide the notched end of the jack handle over the release valve and use the handle to slide the jack under the vehicle Make sure the valve is closed by turning it clockwise 12 Position the jack according to the following guides e Front 4x2 F 350 DRW Note Place jack directly under I beam e Front driver side 4x4 F 38350 DRW Note Make sure the jack fits onto the flat area on the outboard side of the differential housing 336 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies e Front passenger side 4x4 F 350 DRW Note View shown from the rear of WS VA the vehicle to clearly identify the P jack point a Q Note Place the jack directly under axle and inboard of the radius arm so that the jack clears the radius arm e Front F 450 F 550 ani e Rear F 383
255. ing the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter AA Same Lis 7 e 9 20 a 2 ram a0 Ea a2 1s 13 1351 36 oan Fy PERHE c fes Cer Haz e 322 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies The high current fuses are coded as follows Location Rating 1 Relay Blower motor Variable blower control Dual Zone Climate 2 Relay Electronic Shift on the Fly eso Po CC Noted o PT A0A TABS module Pump Pp 8 80A Up fitter auxiliary switch 2 PT AOA ABS module Coil 12 SA Brake On Off BOO relay feed 5A Brake switch Brake switch relay a a ee iad a used o a o o AIC clutch 18 Relay Fuel Pump Driver Module FPDM Fuel injectors Gasoline engines Diesel Fuel Control Module DFCM Diesel engine 19 Relay Back up lamps Reverse Sensing System RSS Engine compartment fuse 63 ae Trailer stop turn Left Trailer stop turn Right 323 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating 22 Relay Stop lamps Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL TBC Customer access mirror PHC Noted o 27 50A Glow Plug Control Module OO 7 ee eee 36 10A Gasoline engines Powertrain Control Module PCM keep alive power
256. into place e Pull up on the lever located at the bottom of the seatback to quickly fold the seatback forward e Pull up on the lever located at the side of the seat cushion to recline the seatback and to return the seat to the upright position 40 20 40 split bench seat if equipped e Lift the track release bar to move the seat forward or backward Ensure the seat is relatched into place e Pull the handle on the side of the seat up to recline the seat e Push down the lever located at the bottom of the seatback to quickly fold the seatback forward 172 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 40 20 40 front seat armrest and console if equipped To release the armrest pull forward on the strap and pull the armrest down To gain access to the storage compartment in your armrest lift the latch to open the lid The lid cannot be opened in the upright position Lift up armrest to return it to a center seatback 173 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Captain s chair if equipped e Lift the bar to move the seat forward or rearward Make sure that the seat is relatched into place e To recline the seatback pull the release lever handle located on the side of the seat up e Push down the lever if equipped located at the bottom of the seatback to quickly fold the
257. ion surface Under normal conditions the Limited slip axle functions like a standard rear axle The axle may exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working PREPARING TO DRIVE A WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles A WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground clearance giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car 283 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death WARNING Loaded vehicles with a higher center of gravity may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Do not overload your vehicle and use extra precautions such as driving at slowe
258. iper on a dry windshield always use the windshield washer In freezing weather be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers Windshield wiper rainlamp feature if equipped with Autolamp When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight and the headlamp control is in the autolamp position the exterior lamps will turn on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off 103 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls TILT STEERING WHEEL 1 Pull and hold the steering wheel release control toward you 2 Move the steering up or down until you find the desired location 3 Release the steering wheel release control This will lock the steering wheel in position WARNING Never adjust the steering column when the vehicle is moving TRANSMISSION CONTROL Tow Haul feature 5 speed automatic transmission if equipped To activate press the transmission control switch TCS located on the ae gearshift The TOW HAUL indicator aa lt light will illuminate in the comes instrument cluster The transmission will operate in all gears Press the transmission control switch again to deactivate Tow Haul mode When you shut off and re start your vehicle the transmission will automatically return to normal mode with Tow Haul feature deactivated For more information refer to the Driving chapter WARNING Do not use the
259. ires Wheel lug nut torque Jump starting Wrecker towing 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus 155 155 155 167 171 171 180 192 201 224 226 229 244 255 261 266 272 274 274 279 281 284 291 293 314 314 315 316 317 326 342 343 348 Table of Contents Customer Assistance 350 Reporting safety defects U S only 356 Reporting safety defects Canada only 357 Cleaning 358 Maintenance and Specifications 368 Engine compartment 370 Engine oil 373 Battery 376 Engine coolant 378 Fuel information 384 Air filter s 402 Part numbers 403 Maintenance product specifications and capacities 405 Engine data 409 Accessories 412 Index 414 All rights reserved Reproduction by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation Copyright 2008 Ford Motor Company 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Introduction CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it For more
260. is on 3 Insert an audio CD into the DVD system label side up 4 The track and elapsed time will CD AUDIO DISC ma 2 00 54 appear in the status bar Use the DVD cursor controls on the bezel to highlight which track you would like to play You can also use the cursor controls to highlight COMPRESSION SHUFFLE or SCAN Once you have highlighted the desired track or function press ENTER on the DVD bezel to confirm your selection 69 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems COMP Compression Compression brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode Press to turn the feature on off SHUFFLE Press to hear all tracks on the current CD in random order Press again to stop SCAN Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current CD Press again to stop Playing MP3 discs To play an MP3 disc on your DVD system 1 Ensure that the vehicle is on or the ignition is in accessory mode 2 Ensure that the DVD system is on 3 Insert the MP3 disc into the DVD system label side up 4 The folder track and elapsed time will appear in the status bar The screen will list the Artist Title Album and File Name COMP Compression Compression brings soft and loud CD MP3 passages together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode Press to turn the feature on off SHUFFLE Press to hear all tracks on the current
261. istance If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time of purchasing your vehicle you may still be eligible Since this information is subject to change please ask your authorized dealer for complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options or visit the Ford ESP website at www ford esp com GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle contact a regional office or owner relations customer relationship office The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U S If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central America the Caribbean or the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Busines
262. items will illuminate when the control on the transmitter is pressed e Headlamps e Parklamps e Tail lamps The lamps will automatically turn off e if the ignition switch is turned to the on position or e the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter lock control is pressed or e the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad if equipped or e after 25 seconds of illumination Note On some vehicles the perimeter lamps illuminated entry feature will not activate in daylight conditions Deactivating activating perimeter lamps illuminated entry You may enable disable this feature by having your vehicle serviced by your authorized dealer You may also perform the following power door lock sequence to enable disable the perimeter lamps feature Note Before starting ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 1 Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the on position 2 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times amp 3 Turn the ignition from the on position to the off position 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the on position The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has bee
263. ition off If the vehicle restarts there may be limited power or there could be full function If the exhaust over temperature condition reoccurs the message center will display STOP SAFELY NOW the chime will sound the engine power will be reduced again and shut down below 3 mph 5km h ENGINE TURNS OFF IN XX Diesel engine only Displayed when the vehicle is in the final 30 seconds of a countdown to where the engine will intentionally be turned off by the PCM The diesel engine shutdown is a Regulatory requirement which may be required of a particular diesel vehicle for sale in States requiring this feature ENGINE TURNED OFF Diesel engine only Displayed after the 30 second countdown ENGINE WARMING PLEASE WAIT XX Diesel engine only Displayed in extremely cold weather typically around 15 F 26 C The accelerator pedal will not respond to pressing this is done so the engine oil can be properly circulated to avoid engine damage from lack of lubrication A timer will begin a countdown from 30 seconds then OK TO DRIVE will display once the counter has reached 0 zero and the accelerator pedal will respond to pressing OK TO DRIVE Diesel engine only Displayed when the time counter has reached 0 zero and the engine is sufficiently warm enough to drive in extremely cold weather refer to the ENGINE WARMING description mentioned previously 148 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA f
264. ity e The system will only output audio to the headphones It will not be capable of providing audio to the speakers The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD DISC and DVD AUX regardless of headphone channel A or B e When a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode both headphone channels A and B will be connected to FES DISC NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation system Refer to the Navigation system supplement for further information SYNC IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC a hands free communications and entertainment system with special phone and media features For more information please refer to the SYNC supplement or to the SYNC section in the Navigation system supplement if equipped 79 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Climate Controls HEATER ONLY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 1 Fan speed adjustment Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle 2 Temperature selection Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle 3 Air flow selections Controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle See the following for a brief description on each control 7i Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents lt A Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the floor vents O OFF Outside air is shut out and the climate system i
265. iving 4 Start cranks the engine Release the key as soon as the engine starts Preparing to start your vehicle Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system This system meets all Canadian Interference Causing Equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise When starting a fuel injected engine don t press the accelerator before or during starting Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine For more information on starting the vehicle refer to Starting the engine in this chapter WARNING Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire WARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas Exhaust fumes can be toxic Always open the garage door before you start the engine See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions 274 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important safety precautions When the engine s
266. ke system Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Restraint System 3 Vehicle line series body type 4 Engine type 5 Check digit 6 Model year 7 Assembly plant 8 Production sequence number TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS You can find a transmission code on the Safety Compliance Certification MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO Label The following table tells you DT aR ie SMT DATE Oaoa XXXXKG WITH G XXXX IKXXXXXX Pie c which transmission each code represents XXXXKX XXXX XX RIMS AT XXX KPAXX PSLCOLD AT XXX PaIXX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO WBTBRK TINTTR TP PS R TAXLE SPR T XXXXX XX XX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XV XXXX XXXXXXX XX Six speed manual Dana ZF 56 650 Six speed manual Dana Z F M6HD W Five speed automatic TorqShift gas engines fr CUB Five speed automatic TorqShift diesel engine 411 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Accessories GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynam
267. key cycle if the condition 145 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls Warning display Check air filter diesel engine only Drain water separator diesel engine only Stop safely now diesel engine only Engine warming please wait xx diesel engine only OK to drive diesel engine only Engine turns off in xx diesel engine only Engine turned off diesel engine only Drive to clean exhaust filter diesel engine only Cleaning exhaust filter diesel engine only Exhaust filter drive complete diesel engine only Oil life change soon gas engine only Oil change required gas engine only PARK BRAKE ENGAGED Displayed when the parking brake is applied or not fully released CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM Displayed when a fault has been detected by the ABS module DRIVER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the driver s door is not completely closed PASSENGER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the passenger s door is not completely closed REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear left door is not completely closed 146 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear right door is not completely closed FUEL LEVEL LOW Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER if equipped Displayed and accompanied by a single chime if there are
268. l 3 Move the 4x4 control to the 4x4 HIGH or 2WD position 4 Hold the shift conditions until the 4x4 LOW indicator light shuts off 5 If the 4x4 LOW or 4x4 High indicator light flashes continuously for more than 10 seconds allow the vehicle to move at a speed below 5 mph 8 km h then repeat steps 2 through 5 while the vehicle is rolling before reporting any shift concerns to your authorized dealer Driving off road with truck and utility vehicles 4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand snow mud and rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles both on and off the road Your vehicle may be equipped with a long front air dam that may become damaged due to reduced ground clearance when taking your vehicle off road This air dam can either be removed or a shorter air dam can be purchased from your authorized dealer In either case if the air dam is to be removed or replaced before going off road refer to the Workshop Manual for the procedure or have your authorized dealer perform the work for you l y D SS l l j a3 o Z A 302 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving How your vehicle differs from other vehicles Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles Your vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damagi
269. l sound when there is a malfunction in the indicator light Safety belt Reminds you to fasten your safety belt A Belt Minder chime will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt Refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter to activate deactivate the Belt Minder chime feature Engine oil pressure lluminates when the oil pressure falls below the a ae normal range Refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Cif equipped Illuminates when your tire pressure is low If the light remains on start up or while driving the tire pressure should be checked Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter When the ignition is first turned to on the light will illuminate for three seconds to ensure the bulb is working If the light does not turn on have the system inspected by your authorized dealer For more information on this system refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Charging system Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly If it stays on while the engine is running there may be a malfunction with the charging system Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related component Low tire pressure warning 0 O Powertrain malfunction Reduced power Electronic throttle control RTT Displays when the
270. lamp control if equipped 0 The headlamp control also operates the fog lamps The fog lamps can be turned on only when the headlamp control is in the gD Os or PS position and the high beams are not turned on Pull headlamp control towards you to turn fog lamps on The fog lamp indicator light will illuminate 89 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Lights Daytime running lamps DRL if equipped Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output To activate e the ignition must be in the on position e the headlamp control is in the off or parking lamp position and e the parking brake must be disengaged WARNING Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather The Daytime Running Lamp DRL system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision High beams ZD Push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate Pull the lever towards you to deactivate Flash to pass Pull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate 90 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus PANEL DIMMER CONTROL Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel and all applicable illuminated switches in the vehicle during headlamp and parklamp operation Move the control to the
271. lant antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location Adding engine coolant When adding coolant make sure it is a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water When the engine is cool add the mixture to the coolant reservoir until the appropriate fill level is obtained WARNING Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts WARNING Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield 379 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSS M97B51 A1 Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Note Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets or an equivalent product meeting Ford specification WSS M99B37 B6 may darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from yellow to golden tan e Do not add mix an orange colored extended life coolant such as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant meeting Ford specification WSS M97B44 D or DEX COOL brand with the factory filled coolant Mixing Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Co
272. ld you have a vehicle concern Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The service is available e 24 hours seven days a week e for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner Guide portfolio Roadside assistance will cover e a flat tire change with a good spare except vehicles that have been supplied with a tire inflation kit e battery jump start e lock out assistance key replacement cost is the customer s responsibility fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 5L of gasoline or 5 gallons 18 9L of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle Fuel delivery service is limited to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period e winch out available within 100 feet 80 5 meters of a paved or county maintained road no recoveries e towing Ford Mercury Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles 56 3 km of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles 56 3 km from the disablement location the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles 56 3 km Trailers shall be covered up to 200 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the neare
273. ldren are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position 203 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children Note This vehicle is not equipped with LATCH lower anchors Use any attachment method as indicated below by X LATCH LATCH Restraint Child CGower lower Type Weight anchors anchors and only Rear Up to facing 48 lb child seat 21 kg Forward Up to facing 48 lb child seat 21 kg Forward Over facing 48 lb child seat 21 kg WARNING Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active air bag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back When possible all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat WARNING Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child s size height weight or age Follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the ins
274. le 1 6 km e Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door e Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread e Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle e Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated 228 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading INFLATING YOUR TIRES Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat Every day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including spare if equipped Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial
275. le is equipped the tire pressure monitoring system TPMS the system indicator light will illuminate when the spare is in use To restore the full functionality of the TPMS system all road wheels equipped with the tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with TPMS have a flat tire serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensor refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheel and Loading chapter Replace the spare tire with the road tire as soon as possible T Type Mini Spare Tire Information Harley Davidson only Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary spare tire This spare tire is considered temporary Replace the temporary spare with a tire of the same size speed rating and load carrying capacity as the other road tires as soon as possible When driving with the temporary spare tire do not e Exceed 50 mph 80 km h e Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label e Tow a trailer e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the temporary spare tire Use more than one temporary spare tire at a time 329 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Use of a temporary spare tire at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise
276. ling Address Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 Telephone 1 800 392 3673 FORD TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 Online Additional information and resources are available online at www genuineservice com e U S dealer locator by Dealer Name City State or Zip Code Owner Guides Maintenance Schedules Recalls e Ford Extended Service Plans e Ford Genuine Accessories e Service specials and promotions 350 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Customer Assistance In Canada Mailing Address Ford vehicles Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 565 3673 FORD Online www ford ca Mailing Address Lincoln vehicles Lincoln Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 387 9333 Online www lincolncanada com Additional Assistance If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling servicing authorized dealer 2 If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved contact the Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager 3 If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies please contact the Ford Customer R
277. liquids of any kind 78 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems onto the media controls or into the system If liquid is accidentally spilled onto the system immediately turn the system OFF and consult a qualified service technician Cleaning the liquid crystal display LCD flip down screen Clean the display screen by applying a small amount of water or any ammonia based household glass cleaner directly to a soft cloth Rub the screen gently until the dust dirt or fingerprints are removed Do not spray the screen directly with water or glass cleaning solvents Overspray from these fluids could drip down into the internal electronics of the screen and cause damage Do not apply excessive pressure while cleaning the screen Cleaning DVD and CD discs Inspect all discs for contamination before playing If necessary clean discs only with an approved DVD and CD cleaner and wipe from the center out to the edge Do not use circular motion Compatibility with aftermarket audio systems headphone only mode When the Family Entertainment System FES detects that the original radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the vehicle the FES will work in a state referred to as Headphone Only Mode This mode allows the FES to operate as a standalone system without interface to the radio While operating in Headphone Only Mode the system will have limited functional
278. lite radio service that broadcasts music sports news and entertainment programming A service fee is required in order to receive SIRIUS service Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include e Hardware and limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle e Use of online media player providing access to all SIRIUS music channels over the internet using any computer connected to the internet U S customers only For information on extended subscription terms contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Note SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number ESN This 12 digit Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate modify or track your satellite radio account You will need this number when communicating with SIRIUS While in Satellite Radio mode you can view this number on the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously 49 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio Display Action Required ACQUIRING Radio requires more No action required than two seconds to This message should produce audio for the disa
279. lity and four wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another e from concrete to gravel there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver steering acceleration or braking Again avoid these abrupt inputs Parking On some 4WD vehicles when the transfer case is in the N Neutral position the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of the driveline Therefore the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P Park or the manual transmission is in gear Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warnin
280. ll momentarily illuminate when the BRAKE ignition is turned to the on position when the engine is not running or in a position between on and start or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on position If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time seek service immediately from your authorized dealer Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the brake system should be inspected immediately by your servicing authorized dealer WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer immediately Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury continues to flash a malfunction has been detected have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated Anti lock brake system If the ABS light stays iluminated or ABS 16 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Airbag readiness If this light fails o to illuminate when ignition is turned to on continues to flash or remains TN on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer A chime wil
281. ll TOW illuminate in the instrument cluster HAUL Tow Haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting Tow Haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the transmission is in the D Overdrive position this engine braking will slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when descending a grade Depending on driving conditions and load conditions the transmission may downshift slow the vehicle and control the vehicle speed when descending a hill without the accelerator pedal being pressed The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based upon the amount the brake pedal is depressed To deactivate the Tow Haul feature and return to normal driving mode press the button on the end of the gearshift lever The TOW HAUL light will no longer be illuminated When you shut off and restart the engine the transmission will automatically return to normal D Overdrive mode Tow Haul OFF WARNING Do not use the Tow Haul feature when driving in icy or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control 3 Third Transmission starts and operates in third gear only 287 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving Used for improved traction on slippery roads Selecting 3 Third provides engine braking 2 Second Use 2 Second to sta
282. lter diesel engine only Cleaning exhaust filter diesel engine only Exhaust filter drive complete diesel engine only Oil life change soon gas engine only Oil change required gas engine only PARK BRAKE ENGAGED Displayed when the parking brake is applied or not fully released CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM Displayed when a fault has been detected by the ABS module 133 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls DRIVER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the driver s door is not completely closed PASSENGER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the passenger s door is not completely closed REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear left door is not completely closed REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear right door is not completely closed XXX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL LOW Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER if equipped Displayed if there are certain faults in the vehicle wiring and trailer wiring brake system Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT if equipped Displayed and accompanied by a single chime in response to faults sensed by the TBC Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information TRAILER DISCONNECTED if equipped Displayed when a trailer connection becomes disconnected either i
283. luster message center to indicate the amount of power going to the trailer brakes relative to the brake pedal or manual control input One bar indicates the least amount of output with six bars indicating maximum output TRAILER CONNECTED This message is displayed when a correct trailer wiring connection a trailer with electric trailer brakes has been sensed during a given ignition cycle e TRAILER DISCONNECTED This message is displayed and accompanied by a single chime when a trailer connection was determined and then a disconnection either intentionally or unintentionally has been sensed during a given ignition cycle It is also displayed if a truck or trailer wiring fault occurs causing the trailer to appear disconnected This message is also displayed during manual activation without a trailer connected 2 Manual control lever Slide the control lever to the left to activate power to the trailer s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle s brakes see the following Procedure for adjusting GAIN section for instructions on proper use of this feature If the manual control is activated while the brake is also applied the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes e Stop Lamps Activating the TBC manual control lever will illuminate both the trailer brake lamps and the tow vehicle brake lamps except the Center High Mount Stop Lamp presuming proper trailer electrical connection Pressing the
284. maintain high speed operation and the engine will run rough Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage therefore 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine 2 Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility 3 If this is not possible wait a short period for the engine to cool 4 Check the coolant level and replenish if low 383 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 5 Re start the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage Take your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible FUEL FILTER For fuel filter replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the fuel filter Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS fg Important safety precautions WARNING Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire WARNING The fuel system may be under pres
285. ment and the ws 1 A wheel 3 be ey gt 2 ZF O74 340 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 4 Be sure to install all the clips on the nuts over the flanges so that there is an even gap all around and the retention clips are fully seated aa 9 H UL m Stowing the flat spare tire Note Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in failure of cable or loss of spare tire 1 Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located in the glove box 2 Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer through the wheel center Pull on the cable to align the components at the end of the cable 3 Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed position underneath the vehicle The effort to turn the jack handle increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when the tire is raised to the maximum tightness Tighten to the best of your ability to the point where the ratchet slip occurs if possible The spare tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten If the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips with little effort take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience 4 Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly tightened Try t
286. ments For additional information please contact the Truck Body Builders Advisory Service at 1 877 840 4338 Use of your Ford light truck as an ambulance without the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package voids the Ford New Vehicle Limited Warranty and may void the Emissions Warranties In addition ambulance usage without the preparation package could cause high underbody temperatures overpressurized fuel and a risk of spraying fuel which could lead to fires If your vehicle is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package it will be indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification Label The label is located on the driver s side door pillar or on the rear edge of the driver s door You can determine whether the ambulance manufacturer followed Ford s recommendations by directly contacting that manufacturer Ford Ambulance Preparation Package is only available on certain Diesel engine equipped vehicles 10 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Introduction Using your vehicle as a stationary power source PTO Refer to the Driving chapter for more information and guidelines for operating a vehicle equipped with an aftermarket power take off system Export unique Non United States Canada vehicle specific information For your particular global region your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Ow
287. milar spare tire wheel A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements WARNING If the tire label shows different tire pressures for the front and rear tires and the vehicle is equipped with TPMS tire pressure monitoring system then the settings for the TPMS sensors need to be updated Always perform the TPMS reset procedure after tire rotation If the system is not reset it may not provide a low tire pressure warning when necessary See the TPMS reset procedure in this chapter 237 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e DRW Six tire rotation 2 2 2 2 If your vehicle is equipped with dual rear wheels it is recommended that Y the front and rear tires in pairs be rotated only side to side We do not recommend splitting up the dual rear wheels Rotate them side to side as a set pair After tire rotation inflation pressures must be adjusted for the tires new positions in accordance with vehicle m requirements UU Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires Note If your tires show uneven wea
288. mode pressing lt SEEK gt will scroll only through tracks within the selected folder Press lt q FOLDER FOLDER P to access the previous next folder if available 38 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems COMPRESS Compression Available only in CD MP3 mode Press MENU until COMPRESS ON OFF appears in the display Use V lt SEEK SEEK to toggle ON OFF When COMPRESS is ON the system will bring soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level 4 AUX Press repeatedly to cycle through FES DVD if equipped ax LINE IN Auxiliary audio mode if equipped SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 modes Satellite Radio if equipped For location and further information on the auxiliary audio mode refer to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 5 SEEK In radio mode press lt Q to access the a SEEK previous next strong station i In CD MP3 mode press d gt to access the previous next CD track In satellite radio mode if equipped press lt q SEEK SEEK P to seek to the previous next channel If a specific category is selected Jazz Rock News etc press lt q SEEK SEEK to seek to the previous next channel in the selected category Press and hold lt q SEEK SEEK gt to fast seek through the previous n
289. mperature is cold When normal condensation occurs a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the lens The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions Examples of acceptable condensation are e Presence of thin mist no streaks drip marks or droplets e Fine mist covers less than 50 of the lens Examples of unacceptable moisture usually caused by a lamp water leak are e Water puddle inside the lamp e Large water droplets drip marks or streaks present on the interior of the lens Take your vehicle to dealer for service if any of the above conditions of unacceptable moisture are present 95 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Lights Replacing exterior bulbs Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently Function Number Trade number of bulbs 2 Tail stop turn sidemarker Pick up only Tail stop turn sidemarker Chassis cabs 3157 only if equipped i 906 i Front clearance lamps 2 and Front 194 maa 4 4 3 96 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Lights Replacing headlamp bulbs aerodynamic 1 Make sure that the headlamps are off and open the hood 2 Remove the four bolts from the top side and bottom front of the a headlamp assembly A 3 Pull the assembly straight out disengaging two snap clips to fender
290. mum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle 242 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on T type tires T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below T145 80D16 is an example of a tire size Note The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 T Indicates a type of tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for temporary service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks 2 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall 4 D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial type tire 5 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter Location of the tire label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s do
291. n To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do NOT release the button 126 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the HomeLink button follow Step 1 in the Programming section For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 STANDARD MESSAGE CENTER IF EQUIPPED With the ignition in the on position the message center located on your instrument cluster displays text A messages that alert you to possible gt problems or malfunctions in your 5 20 vehicle s operating systems All enue warning messages will also provide S PRND321 o an indicator chime 4 For improved message center readability if your vehicle is equipped with Autolamp control the message center brightness cannot be adjusted when parking lamps or headlamps are on in bright daytime ambient conditions refer to Autolamp control in the Lights chapter In lower ambient light conditions the message center brightness can be adjusted using the panel dimmer control when parking lamps or headlamps are on refer to Panel dimmer control in the Lights chapter Selectable features Press and release the SELECT RESET button located in the speedometer to scroll and reset the f
292. n a crash To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child safety seats Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt positioning booster Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap shoulder safety belts fit better They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion while minimizing slouching Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit better and more comfortably Try to keep the belt near the middle of the shoulder and across the center of the chest Moving the child closer a few centimeters or inches to the center of the vehicle but remaining in the same seating position may help provide a good shoulder belt fit 219 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints When children should use booster seats Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and lap shoulder belt to fit properly Generally this is when they reach a height of at least 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall around age eight to age twelve and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 lb 86 kg or upward to 100 lb 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters
293. n affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure Note Do not use snow chains on front tires of vehicles with 20 wheels and tires The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow However in some climates you may need to use snow tires and chains If you need to use chains it is recommended that steel wheels of the same size and specifications be used as chains may chip aluminum wheels Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains e Use only SAE Class S chains e Install chains securely verifying that the chains do not touch any wiring brake lines or fuel lines Drive cautiously If you hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle stop and re tighten the chains If this does not work remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed Do not use tire chains on dry roads e The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains 254 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires
294. n entered and is active 6 Press the power door unlock control twice within 5 seconds 164 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Locks and Security Note The horn will chirp once to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has been deactivated The horn will chirp once and honk once one short and one long to indicate the perimeter lighting feature has been activated 7 Turn the ignition to the off position to exit the procedure Note The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete Illuminated entry The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to unlock the door s The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if e the ignition switch is turned to the on position or e the remote transmitter lock control is pressed or e the 7 e 8 and the 9 e 0 controls on the keyless entry keypad are pressed or e after 25 seconds of illumination The dome lamp control Gf equipped must not be set to the off position for the illuminated entry system to operate The inside lights will not turn off if e they have been turned on with the dimmer control or e any door is open The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the off position 10 minutes after if the dome lamp is off and 30 minutes after if the dome lamp switch is left on SECURICODE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM You can use the keyless
295. n is not damaged Note Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle Refer to the Climate controls chapter for more information 272 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading configuration neutral towing 4x4 with manual shift Transmission in N transfer case Neutral Transfer case Necks sett FR Hublocks set to FREE Manual 4X2 or 4x4 with Do not tow your electronic shift vehicle with any transfer case wheels on the ground as vehicle or transmission damage may occur It is recommended to tow Automatic your vehicle with all four 4 wheels off the ground such as when using a car hauling trailer Otherwise no recreational towing is permitted TAlways make sure that both hub locks are set to the same position In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle see Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter 273 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving STARTING Positions of the ignition 1 Off shuts off the engine and all accessories locks the steering wheel and allows key removal 2 Accessory allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not running This position also unlocks the steering wheel 3 On all electrical circuits operational Warning lights illuminated Key position when dr
296. n pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door 229 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label To check the pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot G e driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated Note If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive
297. n the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter 114 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls Mirror mounted side turn signal indicator if equipped When the vehicle turn signals are activated the outer portion of the mirror housing will blink amber The turn signal feature can be seen by other drivers who may approach from the rear of the vehicle Clearance lamps if equipped Iluminates when the headlamps or parking lamps are switched on This provides additional visibility of your vehicle to other drivers on the road POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The accelerator and brake pedal should only be adjusted when the vehicle is stopped and the gearshift lever is in the P Park position A Press and hold the rocker control to adjust accelerator and brake pedal toward you or away from you WARNING Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving 115 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls The accelerator and brake pedal positions are saved when doing a memory set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality features when a memory position is selected through the remote entry transmitter keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the driver s door if equipped with memory feature Refer to Memory seats power mirrors adjustable pedals in th
298. n top of the screen as the screens cycle through at this rate Frame by frame 1 With a DVD playing press pause a 2 Press the right cursor button The DVD will advance one frame Each press of the right cursor button will advance the DVD video by one frame Headphone auxiliary jacks There are wired headphones not included and auxiliary jacks on the left and right side of your DVD system They can be used to plug in wired headphones or to connect and play auxiliary electronic devices such as game systems personal camcorders video cassette recorders etc 73 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems On the left side of the system is the Headphone A input jack This i 2 3 4 headphone will listen to the media selected on the Channel A source When you need to make any V L R AJA adjustments to the media volume etc ensure that the Channel A source is highlighted Also located here are the various auxiliary jacks which can be used to plug in a VCR camcorder video games etc The specific jacks are as follows 1 Yellow video input 2 White left channel audio input 3 Red right channel audio input 4 Black wired headphone jack not included The B headphone jack 5 is located on the right side of the DVD system 5 Plug in wired headphones not included here ae Note The B headphones can only access DVD and AUX modes Th
299. nd Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Transmission Tow Haul Feature TOW automatic transmission HAUL Cif equipped The Tow Haul light remains illuminated as long as the Tow Haul feature is activated Refer to the Driving chapter for transmission function and operation If the light remains illuminated and will not cancel using the Tow Haul switch located on the end of the gear shift lever have the system serviced immediately or damage to the transmission could occur Four wheel drive low 4x4 Cif equipped Illuminates when four wheel drive low is engaged LOW Four wheel drive high 4x4 Cif equipped Illuminates when four wheel drive high is engaged HIGH Anti theft system Flashes when A the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft System has been activated R Speed control if equipped Iluminates when the speed control is activated Turns off when the speed control system is deactivated Turn signal Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the a o gt hazard lights are turned on If the indicators stay on or flash faster check for a burned out bulb D If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine it has some unique warning lights refer to Instrument Cluster in your 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for detailed information on their function High beams Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on 19 2009 F 250 350 450 5
300. nd winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures give lower fuel economy Driving style good driving and fuel economy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy Habits e Smooth moderate operation can yield up to 10 savings in fuel e Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy 390 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Idling for long periods of time greater than one minute may waste fuel Anticipate stopping slowing down may eliminate the need to stop Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy Slow down gradually Driving at reasonable speeds traveling at 55 mph 88 km h uses 15 less fuel than traveling at 65 mph 105 km h Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving Maintenance Keep tires properly i
301. ne whether a left or right angle provides the best performance Follow the severe duty schedule in your scheduled maintenance information for engine oil and transmission fluid change intervals Snowplowing with your airbag equipped vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and passenger airbag Supplemental Restraint System SRS The SRS is designed to activate in certain frontal and offset frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains sufficient longitudinal deceleration Careless or high speed driving while plowing snow which results in sufficient vehicle decelerations can deploy the airbag Such driving also increases the risk of accidents WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided Never remove or defeat the tripping mechanisms designed into the snow removal equipment by its manufacturer Doing so may cause damage to the vehicle and the snow removal equipment as well as possible airbag deployment WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the air bag supplemental restraint system SRS or its fuses See your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer 312 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment may effect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury Please refer t
302. ner s Guide A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book By referring to the market unique supplement if provided you can properly identify those features recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle This Owner s Guide is written primarily for the U S and Canadian Markets Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export Refer to this Owner s Guide for all other required information and warnings 11 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Introduction These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert A N Fasten Safety Belt M T Airbag Side fe Child Seat Tether ay il Anchor Anti Lock Brake System Brake Fluid Non Petroleum Based Stability Control System gi EL Master Lighting Switch 6 Ts Fog Lamps Front Fuel Pump Reset Vas Windshield GY Defrost Demist 12 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus See Owner s Guide Airbag Front Child Seat Lower Anchor Brake System Parking Brake System Parking Aid System Speed Control Hazard Warning Flasher Fuse Compartment Windshield Wash Wipe Rear Window Defrost Demist Ad ry p gt J 2 OOG eu oe 2 Introduction Vehicle Symbol Glossary Power Windows Front Rear Child Safety Door Lock Unlock Panic Alarm
303. nflated and use only recommended size Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy Use recommended engine oil Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in scheduled maintenance information Conditions Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy approximately 1 mpg 0 4 km L is lost for every 400 lb 180 kg of weight carried Adding certain accessories to your vehicle for example bug deflectors rollbars light bars running boards ski luggage racks may reduce fuel economy To maximize the fuel economy drive with the tonneau cover installed Gf equipped 391 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy e Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 8 10 miles 12 16 km of driving e Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain e Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal e Four wheel drive operation if equipped is less fuel efficient than two wheel drive operation
304. ng USA fus Driver Controls 5 Ensure the latch rod is inserted into the tailgate hole and the locking pins on both sides are engaged into Ps their holes in the pick up box EE 6 Reverse steps for storage of the bed extender Note When the vehicle is in motion ensure the locking pins and knobs are fully engaged Note Ensure all cargo is secured Note When the vehicle is in motion the tailgate load must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg To open the bed extender into grocery mode follow Steps 1 4 by rotating the panels away from the tailgate Close the tailgate 154 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Locks and Security KEYS The key operates all locks on your vehicle You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an emergency If your vehicle is equipped with the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft system your keys are electronically coded to your vehicle using a non coded key will not permit your vehicle to start If you lose your dealer supplied keys replacement keys are available through your authorized dealer POWER DOOR LOCKS IF EQUIPPED Press control to unlock all doors Press control to lock all doors ie al Smart locks if equipped This feature prevents you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if your key is still in the ignition When you open the driver s door and you lock the vehicle with
305. ng and holding both the and buttons simultaneously on the remote entry transmitter for approximately four seconds The hazard lamps will flash twice to indicate that the vehicle has switched to one step unlocking Repeat the procedure to switch back to two step unlocking Locking the doors 1 Press Ay and release to lock all the doors The parking lamps will flash if all the doors are closed and locked 160 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Locks and Security 2 Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed and locked Note The doors will lock again the horn will chirp once and the parking lamps will flash once more If any of the doors are not properly closed the horn will make two quick chirps and the parklamps will not flash Car finder Press twice within three seconds The horn will chirp and the turn lamps will flash It is recommended that this method be used to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm Sounding a panic alarm Press to activate the alarm Press again or turn the ignition to on to deactivate Note The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the off position Memory seats adjustable pedals mirrors if equipped The remote entry system can also control the memory seat adjustable pedals mirrors Press c to automatically move the seat adjustable pedals and mirrors to the desired memory p
306. ng underbody components The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car Maintain steering wheel control at all times especially in rough terrain Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside Do not grip the spokes Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before driving Map out your route before driving in the area To maintain steering and braking control of your vehicle you must have all four wheels on the ground and they must be rolling not sliding or spinning Basic operating principles e Do not use 4WD on dry hard surfaced roads Doing so will produce excessive noise increase tire wear and may damage drive components 4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces e Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle e Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand water gravel snow or ice If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement e If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement slow down but avoid severe brake application ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while
307. nl PASSENGER AIRBAG 197 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING If the light fails to illuminate when the passenger air bag switch is in the OFF position and the ignition switch is in ON have the passenger air bag switch serviced at your authorized dealer immediately WARNING In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the switch always remove the ignition key from the passenger air bag ON OFF switch WARNING An infant in a rear facing seat faces a high risk of serious or fatal injuries from a deploying passenger airbag Rear facing infant seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats unless the passenger airbag is turned off Turning the passenger airbag back on The passenger airbag remains OFF until you turn it back ON 1 Insert the ignition key and turn the switch to ON 2 The OFF light will briefly illuminate when the ignition is turned to On This indicates that the passenger airbag is operational aN r PASSENGER AIRBAG WARNING If the OFF light is illuminated when the passenger airbag switch is in the ON position and the ignition switch is in ON have the passenger airbag switch serviced at your authorized dealer immediately The passenger side airbag should always be ON the airbag OFF light should not be illuminated unless the passenger is a person who meets the requirements stated either in Category 1 2 or 3 of the NHTSA Transport Canada deactivation criteria which follows 198 2009
308. nstructions that the rental agency gives to you Do not attach safety chains to the bumper Trailer brakes Electric brakes and manual automatic or surge type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer s specifications The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations 265 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING If you own a trailer with a hydraulic brake system do not connect the trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle s brake system The vehicle s brake system is only designed to carry the appropriate amount of brake fluid for the vehicle alone Connecting a hydraulic trailer braking system could adversely affect your vehicle s braking performance The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR Integrated trailer brake controller if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a fully integrated electronic Trailer Brake Controller TBC When used properly the TBC helps ensure smooth and effective trailer braking by powering the trailer s electric brakes with a proportional output based on the towing vehicle s brake pressure WARNING The Ford TBC has only been verified to be compatible with trailers having electric actuated drum brakes one to four axles and not hydraulic surge or electric over hydraulic types It is the responsibility of the cu
309. ntentionally or unintentionally and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for more information BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately Refer to Brake fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter LOW TIRE PRESSURE if equipped Displayed when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT if equipped Displayed when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT if equipped Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 134 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls CHECK AIR FILTER Diesel engine only Refer to Instrument Cluster in your 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement DRAIN WATER SEPARATOR Diesel en
310. ntly and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island e Turn off your engine when you are refueling e Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle e Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel e Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places e Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container e Place approved fuel container on the ground e DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle including the cargo area e Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling e DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position Fuel filler cap When fueling your vehicle 1 Turn the engine off 2 Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise until it spins off 3 Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe 4 To install the cap align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the filler pipe 5 Turn the filler cap clockwise until it clicks If the Check Fuel Cap indicator comes on and stays on after you start the engine the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed Turn off the engine remove the fuel filler cap
311. ntrols to make various selections when in any menu When not in a menu and in DVD mode press Krl gt to adjust the brightness A display bar will appear at the bottom of the screen indicating the brightness levels 16 Cursor Brightness controls Remote control Unless otherwise stated all operations can be carried out with the remote control Always point the remote control directly at the player Ensure that there are no obstructions between the remote and player 58 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 1 Power control Press to turn the FES Family Entertainment System ON OFF 2 Cursor controls Use in various active menus to advance the cursor up down left right When not in a Menu the left and right cursor controls decrease and increase the display brightness 3 DISPLAY Press to access the on screen display of the FES functions and adjustments 4 RETURN Press to return to the previous menu screen 5 ANGLE DVD dependent Press to select the angle to view the scene 6 Channel A B Press to select either A or B headphones and then use the MEDIA control to select the desired playing media for the headphones 7 VOL Volume When in Single Play press to increase A or decrease Vv the volume over all speakers When in Dual Play press to increase A or decrease Vv the volume for the wired headphones Wireless headphone
312. nyy ILOAIOSaI UO YYW UOISSTUISUBI onewomy pue NIN UedMJoq pmy Suls1se s IaMog A eNOoddN eas pny deay GOON PIN UOISSTUISURI enue J6 T send 0g pmp aseo Ieysuedy peddinba JD yeys epod yom pue ayerq syoatd pue s geyun oyeiq Sued UOTssTusue_ aseoly oajl suoT UNTIL IeIO1IO O Y queowqny Yoo pue syoel yeos pue osuly 100p Jel ang soye d Jays sayoiey sosuty asvoly sodmg YmMNW 407 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications YILU UOLO TTY 9U PUL Y O6OZN SSM UOeoyoods p10 Jo susuro mb a ayy Joour ATUO p u po urSuy Ioyepueu JOU ST IO 1OJOUL pu fq IM YJU S IO M YJU S JO SNy osuel guyerodo ewou saponsdip y uo uonearpur oy Aq Jos aq pmoys p 4 f pny pue pmy uotsstutsuel JO yuNOUTe 34L T jo009 yueg ur ue yy p ddmb jr pue zIs I J009 uo paseq Area Lew suoryeoydde swos Ayoedeo J Arp eurxordde Auo sayeorpul TPA PIN J 1991109 MsSU 0 IPMA SuTye1edo Jaye eas PMY sy AJLIOA JoTOOD yuegg ur ue YIM poddmbe st uotsstwusue s enuewl pssds g y VOeJAMS PPA V UO VPOTYVA JY YIM soy JTF at JO W0770q VY OF UOISsHUSUeI Y SUTTTY Aq pouTUtejep st Ayoedeo Yor IIMS oSVUILP UOISSTUISURI SNVI ALU PIN J popusuWOdIe1 Y UY 1 YJO pry Aue Jo os PINE AT eNOOUAIN sn Auo prnoys AT eaNOOUAW PNbes yey suOTssTusuRTy oT eUIOINY TRAIOJUL VOIAIOS 4991109 OY JUTULIOJAP 0 WOUDWAO UL BIUDUAIUL
313. o push or pull then turn the tire to be sure it will not move Loosen and retighten if necessary Failure to properly stow the spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire 341 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 5 Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire pressure every six months per scheduled maintenance information or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other components 6 If removed install the spare tire lock if equipped into the bumper drive tube with the spare tire lock key Gif equipped and jack handle WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles 800 km after any wheel disturbance tire rotation changing a flat tire wheel removal etc On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels retighten the wheel lug nuts to the specified torque at 100 miles 160 km and again at 500 miles 800 km of new vehicle operation and after any wheel disturbance tire rotation changing a flat tire wheel removal etc Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and On all two piece flat wheel nuts apply one drop of motor oil between the flat washer and the nut WARNING When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the m
314. o reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the 7 position To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the system OFF or with recirculated air lt gt engaged and A C off e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield e To improve the A C cool down drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been aired out During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for extended periods of time in gear it is recommended to run the A C in the MAX A C position reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting and put the vehicle s transmission into the PARK gear position automatic transmission only to continue to receive cool air from your A C system For maximum cooling performance MAX A C Automatic operation 1 Press AUTO for full automatic operation 2 Do not override A C or recirculated air 3 Set the temperature to 60 F 16 C Override operation 1 Select air distribution 2 Select A C and recirculated air Use recirculated air with A C to provide colder airflow 3 Set the temperature to 60 F 16 C 4 Set highest fan speed initially then adjust to maintain comfort 87 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd
315. o remove it from the lamp assembly 3 Pull out the old bulb from the socket and push in the new bulb 4 Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise 102 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls MULTI FUNCTION LEVER Windshield wiper Rotate the end of the control away from you to increase the speed of the wipers rotate towards you to decrease the speed of the wipers Speed dependent wipers When the wiper control is set on the intermittent settings the speed of the wipers will automatically adjust with the vehicle speed The faster your vehicle is travelling the faster the wipers will go Windshield washer Push the end of the stalk e briefly causes a single swipe of the wipers without washer fluid e a quick push and hold the wipers eS will swipe three times with washer fluid e along push and hold the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for up to ten seconds Courtesy wipe feature One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on the windshield Note Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat Check the washer fluid level frequently Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out Before operating the w
316. o the Body Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment Transmission operation while plowing Operate the vehicle with the automatic transmission gearshift lever in the D Overdrive position and Tow Haul off e Shift transfer case to 4x4 LOW 4WD Low when plowing in small areas at speeds below 5 mph 8 km h Shift transfer case to 4x4 HIGH 4WD High when plowing larger areas or light snow at higher speeds Do not exceed 15 mph 24 km h Do not shift the transmission from a forward gear to R Reverse until the engine is at idle and the wheels are stopped If the vehicle is stuck shift the transmission in a steady motion between forward and reverse gears Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes The transmission and tires may be damaged or the engine can overheat Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute The transmission and tires may be damaged or the engine may overheat Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster chapter for transmission fluid temperature information WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 55 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander 313 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Getting roadside assistance To fully assist you shou
317. o with your tire mileage and safety e Observe posted speed limits e Avoid fast starts stops and turns e Avoid potholes and objects on the road 235 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking WARNING If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud sand etc do not rapidly spin the tires spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Highway hazards No matter how carefully you drive there s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but your safety is more important If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected Tire and wheel alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb
318. olant or any orange colored extended life product such as DEX COOL brand with your factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection e A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in case of emergency to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible Water alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion overheating or freezing e Do not use alcohol methanol brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing e Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the FULL COLD level For all other vehicles which have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow system follow these steps to add engine coolant WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure r
319. ollowing functions Select or reset the function by holding the SELECT RESET button for more than 2 seconds Info menu This menu displays the following items e Odometer Trip Odometer Trip A and Trip B e Engine hour meter if equipped e Distance to Empty e Average Fuel Economy e Setup Menu e System check e Blank 127 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls Odometer Trip odometer Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter Engine hour meter if equipped Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter Distance to empty DTE Selecting this function from the INFO MENU estimates XXX MES TO E approximately how far you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank 0 0 mi under normal driving conditions Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel The DTE function will display XXX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL LOW and sound a chime for one second when you have approximately 50 miles 80 km to empty If you RESET this warning message this display and chime will return within 10 minutes DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles 800 km This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display The running average fuel economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected Average fuel economy AF
320. ommendations or the minimum requirements of law The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA provides education and training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in the correct restraint system Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and your pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle If the child is the proper height age and weight as specified by your child safety seat or booster manufacturer fits the restraint and can be 205 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints restrained properly then restrain the child in the child safety seat or with the belt positioning booster Remember that child seats and belt positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of different heights ages and weights Children who are too large for child safety seats or belt positioning boosters as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer should always properly wear safety belts SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Infant and or toddler seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size
321. ontrols Heated outside mirrors Li if equipped The main mirror glass and lower convex spotter mirror are heated to remove ice mist and fog To activate the heated mirrors press the heated mirror control Oy located on the climate control panel The heated mirrors will operate for 10 minutes then automatically shut off or shut off when the engine is turned off In cases of extreme ice and cold the heater control may need pressing again after 10 minutes in order to fully clear the glass Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to re adjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products Fold away mirrors Fold the side mirrors in carefully before driving through a narrow space like an automatic car wash Powerfold mirrors If equipped with powerfold mirrors you can fold the side mirrors simultaneously using the power mirror switch To operate the powerfold mirrors 1 Rotate the switch to the center neutral position 2 Momentarily pull the switch rearward to auto fold in 3 Momentarily pull the switch rearward again to fold back to design position Note When powerfolding the mirrors it is normal to hear the sound of the motors 112 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Cont
322. operate garage doors entry gate operators security systems entry door locks and home or office lighting WARNING When programming your HomeLink Wireless Control System to a garage door or gate be sure that people and objects are out of the way to prevent potential injury or damage 123 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls Do not use the HomeLink Wireless Control System with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 A garage door which cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards For more information contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming procedures i e new HomeLink equipped vehicle purchase It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed Homelink buttons be erased for security purposes refer to Programming in this section Programming Do not program HomeLink with the vehicle parked in the garage Note Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the accessory position for programming and or operation of the HomeLink It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter
323. operly attached to your vehicle Contact your authorized dealer or a reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance 263 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Hitches WARNING ON PICK UP TRUCKS the trailer hitch provided on this vehicle enhances collision protection for the fuel system DO NOT REMOVE Do not mount a ball hitch sometimes referred to as a trailer ball hitch or trailer ball to the bumper or use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle s bumper or attach to the axle You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10 15 for conventional towing or 15 25 fifth wheel towing of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue Hitch rating The standard hitch has two ratings depending on mode of operation e Weight carrying requires a draw bar and hitch ball The draw bar supports all the vertical tongue load of the trailer e Weight distributing requires an aftermarket weight distributing system which includes draw bar hitch ball spring bars and snap up brackets The vertical tongue load of the trailer is distributed between the truck and the trailer by this system Maximum Gross Trailer 2 5 ID without carrying 2 5 drawbar distributing 2 5 ID with adapter carrying drawbar distributing 5 4L DRW Pickups carrying 2 receiver Weight 12500 5670 1250 567 distributing 264 2009 F 250 350 450 550
324. or Refer to the payload description and graphic in the Vehicle loading with and without a trailer section 243 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS IF EQUIPPED Each tire including the spare Gf provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires O As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if und
325. or operation at GVWR not at GCWR Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle The GCW must never exceed the GCWR Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options no cargo internal or external a tongue load of 10 15 conventional trailer or king pin weight of 15 25 fifth wheel trailer and driver only 150 Ib 68 kg Consult your authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer for more detailed information Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight refers to the amount of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch Examples For a 5 000 lb 2 268 kg conventional trailer multiply 5 000 by 0 10 and 0 15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb 227 to 340 kg For an 11 500 Ib 5 216 kg fifth wheel trailer multiply by 0 15 and 0 25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1 725 to 2 875 lb 782 to 1 304 kg WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label 259 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the origin
326. orce on the brake pedal do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle s stopping distance The ABS will be activated immediately allowing you to retain steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces However the ABS does not decrease stopping distance Parking brake To set the parking brake press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates and remains illuminated until the parking brake is released BRAKE 280 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving Pull the release lever to release the parking brake To prevent the pedal from releasing too quickly place your left foot on the service brake pedal then slowly pull the release lever until the pedal slowly releases Make sure that the pedal is fully released You may want to pull the release lever again to make sure the parking brake is fully released WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P Park automatic transmission or in 1 First manual transmission Note If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission the engine may be required to run while power accessories operate and the parking brake is set It is recommended that wheel chocks be used during this operation If youre parking your vehicle on a
327. ord to become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire Be sure to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately a half hour e Finally have the engine block heater system checked during your fall tune up to be sure it s in good working order 278 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving How to Use the Engine Block Heater Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use To clean them use a dry cloth Depending on the type of factory installed equipment your engine block heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts of power per hour Your factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat however maximum temperature is attained after approximately 3 hours of operation Block heater operation longer than 3 hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional electricity Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the vehicle While not in use make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the engine block heater cord plug BRAKES Occasional brake noise is normal If a metal to metal continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present the brake linings may be worn out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking the vehicl
328. osition the seat position corresponds to the transmitter being used Activating the memory feature To activate this feature 1 Position the seat adjustable pedals and mirrors to the position desired 2 Press and hold either memory 1 button or memory 2 button for five seconds A tone will be heard after Ly 11 2 seconds when the memory store is done continue to hold until a second tone is heard after five secouds 2g 3 Within three seconds press the A button on the keyfob The keyfob unlock will now recall the memory position 161 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Locks and Security Deactivating the memory feature To deactivate this feature 1 Press and hold either memory 1 button or memory 2 button for five seconds A tone will be heard after 142 seconds when the memory store is done continue to hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds 2 Within three seconds press the button on the keyfob The keyfob unlock will not recall the memory position Replacing the battery The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent To replace the battery 1 Twist a thin coin between the two halves of the remote entry transmitter near the key ring DO NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE FRONT HOUSING OF THE REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER surface of the circuit board 2 Do not wipe off any
329. osition locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Start the engine e Depress the brake pedal e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position 286 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving D Overdrive with Tow Haul OFF D Overdrive with Tow Haul OFF is the normal driving position for the best fuel economy The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through gears one through five D Overdrive with Tow Haul ON The Tow Haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a trailer or a heavy load All transmission gear ranges are available when using Tow Haul To activate Tow Haul press the button on the end of the gearshift l C mien TOWHAUL lt I The TOW HAUL indicator light wi
330. ounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion resulting in loss of control 342 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Inspect the wheel pilot hole prior to installation If there is visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole remove loose particles by wiping with clean rag and apply grease Apply grease only to the wheel pilot hole surface by smearing a dime 1 square cm sized glob of grease around the wheel pilot surface 1 with end of finger DO NOT apply grease to lug nut stud holes or wheel to brake surfaces JUMP STARTING WARNING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage WARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Do not attempt to push start your automatic transmission vehicle Automatic transmissions do not have push start capability Attempting to push start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage Pre
331. out 25 feet 7 6 meters away from a vertical plain surface 3 Check your headlamp alignment at night or in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp beam pattern e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 3 25 feet 7 6 meters e 4 Horizontal reference line e 5 Center of headlamps e 6 Center line of the vehicle 2 The center of the headlamp is marked either on the lens a circle or cross marker or on the bulb shield internal to the lamp mark or feature Measure the height from the center of your headlamp to the ground 2 and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter long horizontal line on the wall or screen 1 at this height masking tape works well 3 Turn on the low beam headlamps and open the hood 4 Locate the high intensity area of the beam pattern and place the top edge of the intensity zone even with the horizontal reference line 4 If the top edge of the high intensity area is not even with the horizontal line follow the next step to adjust it 92 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Lights 5 Locate the vertical adjuster 2 for each headlamp Adjust the aim by turning the adjuster control s either clockwise to adjust up or counterclockwise to adjust down 6 In addition to the horizontal line IT marked in step 2 a pair of vertical lines 5 must be marked at the center line of the headlamps on the wall or screen a 7
332. owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability 413 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Index A Accessory delay c ccccccccccceeeees 110 Air cleaner filter 0 402 403 Air conditioning 0 0 84 Airbag supplemental restraint SV SUCH retr RO ta iuacesveseba de 192 and child safety seats 194 description 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeee 192 Cisposal ccccceceessseeesseeeees 197 driver GILDA ersccscensczeseeteseateass 195 indicator light 0 ee 196 Operation c sscsdesiec sessasdensecigsivss 195 passenger airbag ee 195 passenger deactivation SWALEH reesen nein 197 Ambulance packages 0 10 Antifreeze see Engine coolant 378 Anti lock brake system see Brakes 0 00 279 280 Anti theft system 167 170 arming the system 168 170 disarming a triggered SVS CENE desea des setciess EE 170 GIG SOTING saneh 170 Audio system see Radio 00 26 28 35 Automatic transmission 284 driving an automatic overdrive ooo eeeeceeeesseseeeeseeeeees 286 fluid adding 0 00 397 fluid checking eee 397 fluid refill capacities 405 Auxiliary Input Jack oe 42 Auxiliary power point 107 Axle refill capacities 0000001000000 405 414 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus B Battery scccssszcedisisncsbtss
333. paring your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy As a result the transmission may have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation 1 Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle 2 Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle s electrical system 3 Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts 343 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 4 Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables Ensure that vent caps are tight and level 5 Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges Turn all other accessories off Connecting the jumper cables 1 Connect the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery Note In the illustrations lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting boosting battery 2 Connect the other end of the positive cable to the positive terminal o
334. parked next to your vehicle 159 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Locks and Security Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to e unlock the vehicle doors without a key lock all the vehicle doors without a key e activate the personal alarm If there are problems with the remote entry system make sure to take ALL remote entry transmitters with you to your authorized dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem Two step door unlocking 1 Press ma and release to unlock the driver s door Note The interior lamps will illuminate refer to the Illuminated entry feature later in this section if the control on the overhead lamp is not set to the off position 2 Press C and release again within three seconds to unlock the passenger doors The battery saver feature will turn off the interior lamps 10 minutes after the ignition is turned to the off position One step door unlocking If the one step door unlocking feature is activated press C2 and release once to unlock all of the doors Note The interior lamps will illuminate refer to the Illuminated entry feature later in this section if the control on the overhead lamp is not set to the off position Switching from two step to one step door unlocking Your vehicle comes with two step unlocking enabled Unlocking can be switched between two step and one step door unlocking by pressi
335. perate the Tap Up function Press and release this control to increase the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph 1 6 km h e Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed When the vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET control 117 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls Reducing speed while using speed control There are two ways to reduce a set speed e Press and hold the SET control until you get to the desired speed then release the control You can also use the SET control to operate the Tap Down function Press and release this control to decrease the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph 1 6 km h Depress the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached press the SET control Turning off speed control There are two ways to turn off the speed control e Depress the brake pedal This will not erase your vehicle s previously set speed e Press the speed control OFF control Note When you turn off the speed aD control or the ignition your speed control set speed memory is erased KID STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED These controls allow you to operate some radio and climate control features 118 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls Audio control features Press MEDIA to select e AM FM1 FM2 e CD if equipped e DVD if equipped
336. phones Speakers Press once for Dual Play Headphone mode the rear speakers are muted and press again for Single Play same media playing through all speakers You can also 57 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems press the 2 and 4 memory preset buttons on the audio system at the same time to perform the same function For further interaction information refer to Single Play Dual play under Operation later in this section 12 MEDIA Press repeatedly to select from the various possible _ ma playing media sources AM FM1 FM2 SAT if equipped CD DVD DVD AUX The media will show in the status display on the top of the screen when in Dual Play mode When in Single Play mode the media source will be displayed on the radio Note Channel A can access any possible media source AM FM1 FM2 SAT Gf equipped CD DVD DVD AUX Channel B can only access DVD and DVD AUX sources 13 RETURN Press to return to the playing media or to resume e playback 14 MENU When playing a DVD ew press MENU once to enter the DVD disc menu if available and press twice to enter the system set up menu From the set up menu you may select from Angle Aspect Ratio Language Subtitles Disc resume Compression Restore Defaults and Back For more detailed information refer to Menu mode 15 ENTER Press to select confirm the current selection Use the cursor co
337. place or recharge the batteries in the portable music player 4 The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control play pause etc over the attached portable music player 5 For safety reasons connecting or adjusting the settings on your portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is moving Also the portable music player should be stored in a secure location such as the center console or the glove box when the vehicle is in motion The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion USB port if equipped WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so 44 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Your vehicle may be equipped with a USB port located on the instrument panel This feature allows you to plug in media playing devices memory sticks and also to charge devices if they support this feature For further information on this feature refer to Accessing
338. ppear shortly selected channel SAT FAULT Internal module or If this message does system failure not clear within a short present period of time or with an ignition key cycle your receiver may have a fault See your authorized dealer for service INVALID CHNL Channel no longer This previously available available channel is no longer available Tune to another channel If the channel was one of your presets you may choose another channel for that preset button UNSUBSCRIBED Subscription not Contact SIRIUS at available for this 1 888 539 7474 to channel subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel NO TEXT Artist information not Artist information not available available at this time on this channel The system is working properly 50 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio Display Action Required not available NO TEXT NO TEXT NO SIGNAL Category information not available Loss of signal from the SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS tower to the vehicle antenna Update of channel programming in progress Satellite service has been deactivated by SIRIUS Satellite Radio UPDATING CALL SIRIUS 1 888 539 7474 Song title information Song title information not available at this time on this channel The system is working properly Category information not available at this time on this channel The system is working
339. program your remote entry transmitters You must have all remote keyless entry keypads and remote entry transmitters maximum of four available before beginning this procedure Note Do not press the brake pedal anytime during this sequencing as doing so will invalidate the procedure To reprogram the remote entry transmitters 3 1 Ensure the vehicle is electronically unlocked 2 2 Put the key in the ignition 4 3 Cycle eight times rapidly within 10 seconds between the off position and on Note The eighth turn must end in the on position The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that the programming mode has been activated 4 Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter Note If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the procedure over again The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that this remote entry transmitter has been programmed 5 Repeat Step 4 to program each additional remote entry transmitter 6 Turn the ignition to the off position after you have finished programming all of the remote entry transmitters Note After 20 seconds you will automatically exit the programming mode The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that the programming mode has been exited 163 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Locks and Security Perimeter lamps illuminated entry With the Remote Keyless Entry system the following
340. properly You are in a location that is blocking the SIRIUS signal i e tunnel under an overpass dense foliage etc The system is working properly When you move into an open area the signal should return No action required The process may take up to three minutes Call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 to re activate or resolve subscription issues FAMILY ENTERTAINMENT DVD SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus 51 Entertainment Systems Your vehicle may be equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES which allows you to listen to audio CDs MP3 discs watch DVDs and to plug in and play a variety of standard video game systems The DVD player is capable of playing standard DVDs CDs MP3s and is compatible with CD R W CD R and certain CD ROM media Please review this material to become familiar with the FES features and controls as well as the very important safety information Quick start Your Family Entertainment System includes a DVD system two sets of wireless infrared IR
341. puter that monitors the engine s emission control system This system is commonly known as the On Board Diagnostics System OBD II The OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards The OBD II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the Service engine soon C indicator illuminates the OBD II system has detected a malfunction Temporary malfunctions may cause the Service engine soon indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 2 Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 3 The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened See Fuel filler cap in this chapter 393 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 4 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the electrical system dry out After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present the Service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city highway driving No additional vehicle service is required If the Service en
342. r s safety belt is unbuckled e the parklamps headlamps are in the off position If the vehicle is equipped with Autolamps this will not affect the procedure 190 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt Minder this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the Belt Minder system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle To reduce the risk of injury do not deactivate activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle Belt Minder activation and deactivation procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the on position DO NOT START THE ENGINE 2 Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off Approximately 1 minute e Step 3 must be completed within 60 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off 3 At a moderate speed buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 9 times ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state e After Step 3 is complete the safety belt warning light will be turned on for 3 seconds e If Step 4 does not occur within 10 seconds at the end of Step 3 Belt Minder will automatically exit programming mode without changing its enable status 4 Within 7 seconds of the light turning on at a moderate speed buckle then unbuckle the safety belt e This will disable the B
343. r might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system WARNING Backup as slow as possible since higher speeds might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle 294 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving WARNING Do not use the camera system with the tailgate open If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged then check with your authorized dealer to have your rear video system checked for proper coverage and operation Night time and dark area use At night time or in dark areas the camera system relies on the reverse lamp lighting to produce an image Therefore it is necessary that both reverse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark If either of the lamps are not operating stop using the camera system at least in the dark until the lamp s are replaced and functioning Servicing e If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R Reverse have the system inspected by your authorized dealer e If the image is not clear then check if there is anything covering the lens such as dirt mud ice snow etc If the image is still not clear after cleaning have your system inspected by your authorized dealer FOUR WHEEL DRIVE 4WD OPERATION IF EQUIPPED WARNING For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter When four wheel drive 4WD is eng
344. r speeds avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing for increased stopping distance when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Over loading or loading the vehicle improperly can deteriorate handling capability and contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION IF EQUIPPED Brake shift interlock This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P Park when the ignition is in the 3 on position and the brake pedal is not depressed If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of the P Park position with the ignition in the 3 ON position and the brake pedal depressed 1 Apply the parking brake Turn the ignition key to 1 off then remove os the key Locate the access cover plate for the brake shift interlock override It is located on top of the steering column shroud 284 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving access cover Insert the tool into the access hole and slide the white override button towards the left Move the gear shift lever into N Neutral while holding the white override disc towards the left 3 Start the vehicle If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle s brakelamps are not operating properly Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter
345. r ask your authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire wheel A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall 238 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on P type tires P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed rating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tire size load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example 1 P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that may be used for servi
346. r eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing to BBB AUTO LINE 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington Virginia 22203 1833 BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1 800 392 3673 Note Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation 353 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Customer Assistance UTILIZING THE MEDIATION ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings In the CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient
347. r height age and weight Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child WARNING All children are shaped differently The Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable child height age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety organizations or are the minimum requirements of law Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child and is compatible with and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height age and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children A r Recommended Baa Child size height weight or age AE Ge Infants or Children weighing 40 lb 18 kg or less Use a child safety toddlers generally age four or younger seat Sometimes called an infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat 202 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for Safety Rest
348. r operation is noted For proper care of soiled safety belts refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision 223 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets highways and off road Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must e Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers e Drive at safe speeds for the conditions e Keep tires properly inflated e Never overload or improperly load your vehicle and e Make sure every passenger is properly restrained WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt All occupants must wear seat belts and children infants must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk o
349. r when cleaning the filter after a DRIVE TO CLEAN EXHAUST FILTER message was previously displayed When this message is displayed various engine actions will raise the exhaust temperature in the DPF to clean the exhaust filter After the exhaust filter is cleaned the exhaust temperature will fall back to normal levels This message is NORMAL WARNING When the CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER message appears in the message center do not park near flammable materials vapors and structures until filter cleaning is complete EXHAUST FILTER DRIVE COMPLETE Diesel engine only Displayed when the vehicle has completed the adequate drive cycle to clean the DPF This message is NORMAL WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire XX OIL LIFE CHANGE SOON Gas engine only Displayed when an oil change will soon be required and shows the percentage of oil life left OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Gas engine only Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0 the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message will be displayed OIL LIFE OK displays after you have changed the oil 136 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls OPTIONAL MESSAGE CENTER IF EQUIPPED With the ignition in the on position the message center located on your instrument cluster displays important
350. r within the COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir If the level falls below add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section Your vehicle was factory filled with a 50 50 engine coolant and water concentration If the concentration of coolant falls below 40 or above 60 the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly A 50 50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following e Freeze protection down to 34 F 36 C e Boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion e Proper function of calibrated gauges 378 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications When the engine is cold check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir e The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE as listed on the engine coolant reservoir depending upon application Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval schedules e Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your vehicle in this chapter If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty If the reservoir is low or empty add engine coolant to the reservoir Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable do not use engine coo
351. raints for Children 3 5 4 Recommended esi Child size height weight or age seg cea ETO Children who have outgrown or no Use a longer properly fit in a child safety belt positioning seat generally children who are less booster seat than 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 lbs 18 kg and 80 lbs 86 kg and upward to 100 lbs 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Children who have outgrown or no Use a vehicle longer properly fit in a belt positioning safety belt having booster seat generally children who the lap belt snug are at least 4 feet 9 inches and low across 1 45 meters tall or greater than 80 Ib the hips shoulder 36 kg or 100 lb 45 kg if belt centered recommended by child restraint across the manufacturer shoulder and chest and seatback upright You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the U S and Canada Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 ft 9 in 1 45 meters tall or 80 lb 86 kg Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle When possible always properly restrain children twelve 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that chi
352. re 110 fold away neseser 112 114 side view mirrors power 111 SIGNAL a scisssecadsiees ssncdecsncesseasaxernae 115 MOOn POOL ssicsivssscsscsdaceviesascasisce 122 Motorcraft parts 384 403 N Navigation system eee 79 O Octane rating sssri 388 Oil see Engine oil 0 0 373 Overdrive seruan tices a 104 P Parking brake sessssossisenssess 280 Parts see Motorcraft parts 403 Pedals see Power adjustable foot pedals eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 115 Power adjustable foot pedals 115 417 Index Power distribution box SEO FUSES caroseriei 322 Power door locks ccccee 155 Power mirrors eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 111 Power point 0 cececeeeeeeeee 107 Power steering esecsecceeese 282 fluid checking and adding 395 fluid refill capacity 405 Power Windows c ccccceeeees 108 Preparing to drive your vehicle oe eeecccccecsecesesseeeeseneeees 283 R RAGIO es sies isdieass eoetiaacasscts 26 28 35 Rear seat entertainment SyS LENT sate ves cde ae eN EARE E E 51 Relay eioen 317 Remote entry system 0 159 illuminated entry 164 165 locking unlocking COOLS apogos on 155 160 replacing the batteries 162 Reverse camera cccceeeeeeeeees 293 Reverse sensing system 291 Roadside assistance 0000 314 S Safety belts see Safety restraints 180 185 Safety defects reporting 356 357 Safety
353. re air can be added to the tires Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure 248 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TPMS reset procedure if applicable The TPMS reset tool is ONLY provided for vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures The TPMS reset procedure needs to be performed after tire rotation only on these vehicles WARNING To determine if your vehicle has different recommended pressures for the front and rear tires refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door See Vehicle Loading in this chapter for more information Overview To provide the vehicle s load carrying capability some trucks require different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to the rear tires The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS equipped on these vehicles is designed to illuminate the Low Tire Pressure Warning indicator at two different pressures one for the front tires and one for the rear tires Since tires need to be rotated to provide consistent performance and maximum tire life the Tire Pressure Monitoring System needs to know when the tires are rotated to determine which set of tires are on the front and which are on the rear With this information the system can detect and properly warn of low tire pressures WARNING Always perform the
354. reak in Drive your new vehicle at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km before towing a trailer For more detailed information about towing a trailer refer to Trawler towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break in oils since these additives may prevent piston ring seating See Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil usage SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty refer to the Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner s Guide Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle For U S only Cif equipped if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company an
355. rear seating positions WARNING Front seating positions only If seating two adults and a child Ford recommends properly restraining the child in the center front seating position but only if doing so will not interfere with driving the vehicle This arrangement provides lap and shoulder belt and airbag protection for adult occupants and an attachment method for a child restraint If the child seat interferes with driving the vehicle and the child restraint is forward facing the child may be restrained in the passenger seat Move the seat as far rearward as possible to minimize the likelihood of interaction with the front passenger airbag Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts Ensure the child is properly restrained in an appropriate child seat or with the use of a booster 1 Lengthen the lap belt To lengthen the belt hold the tongue so that its bottom is perpendicular to the direction of webbing while sliding the tongue up the webbing 213 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Place the child safety seat in the center seating position 3 Route the tongue and webbing through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for the center seating position until you hear a snap and feel it l
356. res that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail 232 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequently and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist Tire wear When the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning Built in treadwear indicators or wear bars which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn giir down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm aa y When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire is worn out and must be replaced Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so inspection after off road use is also recommended WARNING Age Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather storage conditions and conditions of use load speed inflation pressure etc the tires experi
357. ricate and try again When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 ft 3 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi greater than the maximum pressure a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft 8 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels if equipped are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System if equipped If the TPMS indicator is flashing your TPMS is malfunctioning Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS or some component of the TPMS may be damaged if equipped Safety practices Driving habits have a great deal to d
358. rking properly i e if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed To obtain an accurate fluid check drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating temperature approximately 20 miles 80 km If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking 397 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 1 Drive the vehicle 20 miles 80 km or until it reaches normal operating temperature 2 Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake 3 With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage 4 Latch the gearshift lever in P Park and leave the engine running 5 Remove the dipstick wiping it clean with a clean dry lint free rag If necessary refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment in this chapter for the location of the dipstick 6 Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube 7 Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level The fluid should be in the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient temperature
359. rols Powerfold mirror positions from left to right Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 The powerfold mirrors may be folded forward rearward manually to any of the three positions shown and electrically to positions 1 and 2 only If a mirror is folded manually forward to position 3 you must manually fold it back to position 1 or 2 in order for the powerfold function to continue functioning Note Although it is possible to electrically fold the mirror from position 3 to 2 it was not designed for this functionality and may not always work under all conditions Note Ten or more switch activations within one minute or repeated fold unfolding of the mirrors while holding the switch rearward during the full travel may cause the system to disable the fold unfold function to protect the motors from overheating Should this occur wait approximately 314 minutes for the system to reset and function to return to normal Note The powerfold mirrors are designed to operate while the vehicle is stationary or traveling at moderate speeds If you attempt to powerfold the mirrors at high speeds they may not fully fold forward rearward slow down and powerfold or manually fold the mirrors in order to complete the fold operation Note If the power fold telescope mirror glass appears loose or vibrates when driving it is possible that the mirrors have been manually folded or telescoped To minimize the vibration ensure that the mirrors are elec
360. rs in the display that you would like to replace press OK SONG REPLACED will appear in the display e DELETE SONG Press OK to delete a song from the system s memory Press A IV to cycle through the saved songs When the 36 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems song appears in the display that you would like to delete press OK The song will appear in the display for confirmation Press OK again and the display will read SONG DELETED If you do not want to delete the currently listed song press A IV to select either RETURN or CANCEL Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS e DELETE ALL SONGS Press OK to delete all songs from the system s memory The display will read ARE YOU SURE Press OK to confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL DELETED Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS e ENABLE ALERTS DISABLE ALERTS Press OK to enable disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel The system default is disabled SONG ALERTS ENABLED DISABLED will appear in the display The menu listing will display the opposite state For example if you have chosen to enable the song alerts the menu listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on so your other option is to turn them off Satellite radio is av
361. rt up on slippery roads or to provide additional engine braking on downgrades 1 First e Provides maximum engine braking e Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever e The transmission will not downshift into 1 First at high speeds it will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 First when the vehicle reaches slower speeds Forced downshifts e Allowed in D Overdrive or D Drive e Depress the accelerator to the floor e Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION IF EQUIPPED R130 H L24 Using the clutch Manual transmission vehicles have a starter interlock that prevents cranking the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed 288 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving To start the vehicle 1 Make sure the parking brake is fully set 2 Press the clutch pedal to the floor then put the gearshift lever in the neutral position 3
362. running e Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level below the MIN mark on the reservoir e Some noise is normal during operation If excessive check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your dealer e Heavy or uneven efforts may be caused by low power steering fluid Check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your dealer 282 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving e Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on the reservoir as this may result in leaks from the reservoir If the power steering system breaks down or if the engine is turned off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort If the steering wanders or pulls check for e an improperly inflated tire e uneven tire wear e loose or worn suspension components e loose or worn steering components e improper steering alignment If any steering components are serviced or replaced install new fasteners many are coated with thread adhesive or have prevailing torque features which may not be re used Never re use a bolt or nut Torque fasteners to specifications in Workshop Manual A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander pull LIMITED SLIP AXLE IF EQUIPPED This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces particularly when one wheel is on a poor tract
363. s 25 0 cm away the tone will sound continuously If the RSS detects a stationary or receding object further than 10 inches 25 0 cm from the side of the vehicle the tone will sound for only three seconds Once the system detects an object approaching the tone will sound again The RSS may have reduced performance or an increased chance of false detection if the tailgate is not locked and in the upright position If the tailgate is down the RSS tone may be heard intermittently or continuously The tone may also be heard if items in the truck bed protrude rearward outside the bed The RSS automatically turns on when the gearshift lever is placed in R Reverse and the ignition is on An RSS control allows the driver to Raa turn the RSS on and off To turn the RSS off the ignition must be on OFF and the gear selector in R Reverse An indicator light on the control will iluminate when the system is turned off If the indicator light illuminates when the RSS is not turned off it may indicate a failure in the RSS The RSS will remain off until either the RSS control is pushed again or the ignition switch is recycled Keep the RSS sensors located on the rear bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt do not clean the sensors with sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the RSS 292 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Drivin
364. s OK to confirm your selection For further information on the SYNC system refer to the SYNC supplement Navigation system SYNC hands free control features if equipped Press VOICE briefly until the voice t icon appears on the Navigation display to use the voice command feature Press to activate phone mode or answer a phone call Press and hold to exit phone mode or end call 120 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls For further information on the Navigation system SYNC system refer to the Navigation System and SYNC supplements UPFITTER CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the Upfitter option package which will provide four switches mounted AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 in the center of the instrument panel labeled AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 X 5 ke and AUX 4 These switches will only operate while the ignition is in the on position whether the engine is running or not It is however recommended that the engine remain running to maintain battery charge when using the Upfitter switches for extended duration or higher current draws This is even more important for vehicles with diesel engines since the glow plugs are also draining battery power when the ignition key is in the on position When switched on by the operator they provide 10 amps 15 amps or 30 amps of electrical battery power for a variety of
365. s Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 813 594 4857 FAX 813 390 0804 Email expcac ford com If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U S or Canada register your vehicle identification number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations Customers in the U S should call 1 800 392 3673 355 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Customer Assistance ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio contact Helm Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED P O Box 07150 Detroit Michigan 48207 Or to order a free publication catalog call toll free 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST Helm Incorporated can also be reached by their website www helminc com Cltems in this catalog may be purchased by credit card check or money order Obtaining a French owner s guide French Owner s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited Service Publications CHQ202 The Canadian Road P O Box 2000 Oakville ON Canada L6J 5E4 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS U S ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
366. s turned off lt A Distributes outside air through the floor vents Gp Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and floor vents Y Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the QQ position e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air flow to the back seats To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive in the O OFF position e Under normal weather conditions do not leave the airflow selector in OFF This allows the vehicle to breathe using the outside air inlets e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select 7 2 Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort 80 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Climate Controls 3 Set the fan speed to the highest setting 4 Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS IF EQUIPPED e Manual heating and air conditioning system e Manual heating and air con
367. s without cranking the engine If the Service engine soon tc indicator blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing if the Service engine soon Cc indicator stays on solid it means that the vehicle is ready for I M testing 394 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The OBD II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving A complete check may take several days If the vehicle is not ready for I M testing the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway highway followed by 20 minutes of stop and go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete If the vehicle is still not ready for I M testing the above driving cycle will have to be repeated POWER STEERING FLUID Check the power steering fluid Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the service interval schedules If adding fluid is necessary use only MERCON ATF Gasoline engine shown diesel engine similar Refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment in the
368. sagesseanssadince 376 acid treating emergencies 376 jumping a disabled battery 348 maintenance free sses 376 replacement specifications 403 SETVICING ssvessssvisercssesdecsscevsencaee 376 Belt Minder ceecee 188 Booster seats ccccccccssceeesseeeees 220 BARES coccscscsiceiesigeiscaesscosvteaveacdess 279 anti lock 0 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeee 279 280 anti lock brake system ABS warning light ceceeeeeeees 280 fluid checking and adding 396 fluid refill capacities 405 Parking shena 280 shift interlock ccccceeeee 284 1132 cae i nan 266 BUDS deisinn 95 C Capacities for refilling fluids 405 Cassette tape player 0 08 26 Cell phone USE oo eeeeeeeeeseeeeeteeees 9 Child safety seats 0 0 0 0 206 attaching with tether straps 214 in front seat sesioen 206 210 in rear seat we 206 210 214 LATCH s2 scceeveeecathitvesseenceess 214 Child safety seats booster SC AUG es N AE E E A 220 Cleaning your vehicle engine compartment 360 instrument panel 362 363 INUETION senesced ian 364 plastic parts wo cece 361 Safety belts oo cceccceeeseeeees 364 WAS IMG scx sitet sidaciacscchtesvecszsedese 358 WAXING erh aena ATERS 359 WACEl Sisi eestor cesvenssite 359 wiper blades onn000000000000000 361 Climate control see Air conditioning or Heating 80 84 Clock adjust 6 CD ity dash sieca 37 AM FM CD oe eecceecceetee
369. scs if available 9 lt q FOLDER In folder mode press A FOLDER to access the previous folder on MP3 discs if available 10 FF Fast forward Press FF E Gal to manually advance in a CD MP3 track 11 REW Rewind Press REW to REW manually reverse in a CD MP3 track 12 Memory presets To set a station Select frequency band AM FM1 FM2 tune to a station press and hold a preset control until sound returns You may store up to six stations in each frequency band for a total of 18 In satellite radio mode if equipped there are 18 available presets six each for SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 To save satellite channels in your memory presets tune to the desired channel then press and hold a preset control until sound returns Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 13 TEXT SCAN In radio and ES CD MP3 mode press and hold for a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks Press again to stop In CD MP3 mode press and release to display track title artist name and disc title In satellite radio mode if equipped press and release to enter TEXT MODE and display the current song title While in TEXT MODE press again to scroll through the current song title artist channel category and the SIRIUS long channel name In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be displayed When the gt indicator is acti
370. se hands free communication system Remote start Vehicle security systems Wheel locks Not all accessories are available for all models For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle e When adding accessories equipment passengers and luggage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification Label Consult your authorized dealer for specific weight information e The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems such as two way radios telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by your authorized dealer e Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use e To avoid interference with other vehicle functions such as anti lock braking systems amateur radio users who install radios and antennas onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in the area of the driver s side hood Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the
371. se streaking and smearing Refer to the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this chapter State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol a common windshield washer antifreeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system WARNING If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F 5 C use washer fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident Note Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir Washer fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system components 372 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES 1 Pull the wiper arm away from the vehicle Turn the blade at an angle Y from the wiper arm Push the lock tab to release the blade and pull the 2 lt wiper blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm 2 Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the
372. se the tool with the arrow pointing away from the rim as it may not activate the sensor 9 Press and release the green button and hold the tool to the tire sidewall until the horn sounds The red light on the TPMS reset tool will illuminate while the tool is active The horn will sound once within 10 seconds to indicate the process was successful Note e If a double horn chirp is heard repeat the procedure If a single horn chirp is not heard move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least a Y turn and repeat the procedure starting with Step 1 e If a double horn chirp is heard even after the wheels were repositioned seek service from your authorized dealer 253 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 10 Perform Steps 8 and 9 on the right front tire right rear tire and finally the left rear tire Training is complete after the horn sounds for the last tire trained left rear tire and the message center displays TRAINING COMPLETE Turn the ignition to off If two short horn beeps are heard the reset procedure was unsuccessful and must be repeated If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard when the ignition is turned to off seek assistance from your authorized dealer SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS WARNING Snow tires must be the same size load index speed rating as those originally provided by Ford Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford ca
373. seatback forward Adjusting the front power seat if equipped i WARNING Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving A WARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring people in a collision or sudden stop A WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips a WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion 174 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Press front to raise or lower the front portion of the seat cushion 4 LI i T Press rear to raise or lower the rear portion of the seat cushion 4 Press the control to move the seat forward backward up or down Using the manual lumbar support The lumbar support control is located on the outboard side of the 7 seat Turn the lumbar support clockwise for more support Turn the lumbar support l counterclockwise for less support 175 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Heated seats if equipped The heated seat control is located on the climate control panel WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin beca
374. section in this chapter Use of a non approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transmission component damage If necessary add fluid in 1 2 pint 250 ml increments through the filler tube until the level is correct If an overfill occurs excess fluid 4 should be removed by a qualified technician An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components 399 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Checking and adding manual transmission fluid if equipped 1 Clean the filler plug 2 Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level 3 Fluid level should be at the bottom of the opening 4 Add enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening comm 5 Install and tighten the fill plug securely Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications Refer to Maintenance Product Specifications and Capacities in this chapter 400 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications TRANSFER CASE FLUID IF EQUIPPED 1 Clean the filler plug 2 Remove the filler plug
375. sed any time a child safety seat except a booster is installed in a passenger front or outboard rear seating position if equipped Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter 182 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How to use the automatic locking mode e Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt e Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out e Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How to disengage the automatic locking mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING After any vehicle collision the front passenger and rear outboard safety belt systems must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly In addition all safety belts should be checked for proper function 183 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REP
376. service from your authorized dealer immediately 396 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications CLUTCH FLUID IF EQUIPPED Check the fluid level Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the service interval schedules During normal operation the fluid level in the clutch reservoir should remain constant If the fluid level drops refill the fluid level to the step in the reservoir Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to meet Ford specifications Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter WARNING Carefully read cautionary information on product label For MEDICAL EMERGENCY INFORMATION contact a physician or Poison Control Center immediately on Ford Motorcraft products call 1 800 959 3673 FORD Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury 1 Clean the reservoir cap before removal to prevent dirt and water from entering the reservoir 2 Remove cap and rubber diaphragm from reservoir 3 Add fluid until the level reaches the step in the reservoir 4 Reinstall rubber diaphragm and cap onto reservoir TRANSMISSION FLUID Checking automatic transmission fluid if equipped Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes Your transmission does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not wo
377. so always wear the shoulder belt properly and don t allow any slack in either the lap or shoulder portions Before you can reach and latch a combination lap and shoulder belt having a cinch tongue into the buckle you may have to lengthen the lap belt portion of it 1 To lengthen the lap belt pull some webbing out of the shoulder belt retractor 2 While holding the webbing below the tongue grasp the tip metal portion of the tongue so that it is parallel to the webbing and slide the tongue upward 3 Provide enough lap belt length so that the tongue can reach the buckle 185 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How to fasten the cinch tongue Regular cab center seating position and Super Cab Crew Cab rear center seating positions 1 Pull the combination lap and shoulder belt from the retractor so that the shoulder belt portion of the safety belt crosses your shoulder and chest 2 Be sure the belt is not twisted If the belt is twisted remove the twist 3 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for your seating position until you hear a snap and feel it latch 4 Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on the tongue WARNING The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the hips not across the waist While you are fastened in the safety belt the combination lap shoulder belt with a cinch tongue
378. specifications 384 403 fuel pump shut off switch 316 improving fuel economy 389 octane rating 0 ee 388 409 QUAMIEY irruere pne 388 running out of fuel 388 safety information relating to automotive fuels 0 ee 384 Fuel pump shut off switch 316 416 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus FUSES woeceeececesccesesesceeeseeeeees 317 318 G Gas cap see Fuel cap 386 Gas mileage see Fuel economy sesse 389 GG AUIS ES 5 50 85 Seca3desvaedsachesndodesstegiearees 21 transmission fluid temperature gauge ecc 26 H Hazard flashers smosrisireireera 315 Head restraints 0 0 0 0 171 177 Headlamps srureninni roiie 89 AMINE oriei TEA 91 93 autolamp system 000000 89 daytime running lights 90 HASH to paS uiraa 90 high EAM seciasicigcsdor ceasaveercers 90 replacing bulbs 008 97 99 turning on and off 0 89 Heating heater only system cc08 80 heating and air conditioning SVSLGI assaig n nnana 81 84 Homelink wireless control SYS LET epssiacasicseests asanctueteceecoedtens 123 HOOR arare nE 369 I IREA TNH CO UREO A EASE 274 409 Illuminated visor mirror 105 Infant seats see Safety seats oo ees 206 Inspection maintenance I M COSTING oatips sisii 394 cleaning oreren 362 363 CIMISCEY cessisnesaceiselsstnasdeessesteossaece lighting up panel and INGETIOL
379. st authorized dealer If the trailer is disabled but the towing vehicle is operational the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide for information on e coverage period e exact fuel amounts 314 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies e towing of your disabled vehicle e emergency travel expense reimbursement e travel planning benefits In Canada for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage you may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty s Roadside Assistance expiring For more information and enrollment contact 1 877 294 2582 or visit our website at www ford ca Using roadside assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference In the United States this card is found in the Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment In Canada the card is found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance call 1 800 241 3673 Canadian customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 665 2006 If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 miles To obtain reimbursement information U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle c
380. st depending on the type of trailer and hitch used These additional maximum trailer weight and tongue load limitations are listed in the chart table that follows the listing of GCWRs Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle s engine transmission axle brakes tires and suspension Inspect these components carefully prior to and after any towing operation Refer to Transmission fluid temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster chapter for the transmission fluid temperature information Note Do not exceed the GCWR listed for your vehicle on the following chart table or the GVWR GAWR or tire ratings specified on the Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label WARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended trailer weight which exceeds the limit of the vehicle s GCWR GVWR GAWR or tire ratings could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and personal injury 262 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Rear axle Manual Automatic F 250 Pick up 5 4L ae A F 350 Single Rear Wheel SRW Pick up F 350 Dual Rear Wheel DRW Pick up 6 8L F 350 Single Rear Wheel SRW Chassis Cab F 350 Dual Rear Wheel DRW Chassis Cab F 450 Chassis Cab F 550 4 88 5 38 26000 11793 26000 11793 Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is pr
381. stem is equipped with two sets of battery powered infrared wireless headphones Two AAA batteries are needed to operate the headphones Batteries are included Additional infrared wireless headphones may be purchased for use with the system Also wired headphones may be purchased and plugged in where indicated on the left and right hand sides of the system Refer to Wired Headphones following 62 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems To install the batteries remove the screw at the bottom of the cover Then lightly press down on top and slide the cover off When replacing the batteries use two new batteries alkaline recommended and install them with the correct orientation as indicated in the battery housing 63 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems To operate the headphones e Press POWER on the ear piece to turn on the headphones A red indicator light will illuminate indicating the headphones are ON Press POWER again to turn the headphones off Adjust the headphones to comfortably fit your head using the headband adjustment Select the desired audio source Channel A or B for each set of wireless headphones by using the A B selection switch on the ear piece e Adjust the volume control to the desired listening level Ensure that the headphones are turned off when not in use After approx
382. stomer to ensure that the trailer brakes are adjusted appropriately functioning normally and all electric connections are properly made The TBC user interface consists of the following 1 GAIN adjustment buttons Pressing these buttons will adjust the TBC s power output to the trailer brakes in 0 5 increments The GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 0 or decreased to a minimum of 0 no trailer braking Pressing and holding a button will raise or lower the setting continuously The gain setting will display in the message center as follows TBC GAIN XX X The trailer brake controller TBC is designed to display three items of information in the instrument cluster message center These are gain setting output bar graph and trailer connectivity status They will appear as follows in the message center 266 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e TBC GAIN XX X NO TRAILER The instrument cluster message center will display the current gain setting during a given ignition cycle and when adjusting the gain This message is also displayed during manual activation without a trailer connected or when gain adjustments are made with no trailer connected e TBC GAIN XX X OUTPUT When the vehicle s brake pedal is pushed or when the manual control is activated bar indicators will illuminate in the instrument c
383. sure If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap Otherwise fuel may spray out and injure you or others WARNING If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision which may result in serious personal injury WARNING Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled WARNING Gasoline may contain benzene which is a cancer causing agent 384 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel e Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle e Always turn off the vehicle before refueling e Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowed call a physician immediately even if no symptoms are immediately apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes
384. t between the left and right speakers Setting the clock Press and hold CLK until the hours start to flash then use A IV lt q SEEK gt to adjust To adjust minutes press CLK again to make the minutes start to flash and use A IV E SEEK to adjust Press CLK again to exit the clock setting mode 3 SEEK Press A SEEK to access the previous next strong station 4 Memory presets To set a station Select frequency band AM FM1 FM2 tune to a station press and hold a preset button until sound returns You may store up to six stations in each frequency band for a total of 18 5 AM FM Press AM FM to select Po AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 6 ON OFF Volume Press VOL VOL PUSH PUSH to turn ON OFF Turn VOL PUSH to increase decrease volume 27 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 7 CLK Clock Press CLK to toggle between the clock and radio Ne frequency AM FM stereo single CD satellite compatible sound system if equipped 8 Oeo AS SS ee Gsen ZX sesx REW FF lt FOLDER FOLDER SHUFFLE m l OK C 1 2 3 4 5 6 ot TETA WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and ot
385. t for diesel engine component locations 5 4L V8 gasoline engines 1 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 2 Battery 3 Transmission fluid dipstick automatic transmission 4 Engine oil filler cap 5 Engine oil dipstick 6 Power steering fluid reservoir 7 Brake fluid reservoir 8 Engine coolant reservoir 9 Air filter assembly 10 Power distribution box 370 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 6 8L V10 gasoline engine 1 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 2 Battery 3 Transmission fluid dipstick automatic transmission 4 Engine oil filler cap 5 Engine oil dipstick 6 Power steering fluid reservoir 7 Brake fluid reservoir 8 Engine coolant reservoir 9 Air filter assembly 10 Power distribution box 371 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID lt 7 Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low In very cold weather do not fill the reservoir completely Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification WSB M8B16 A2 Do not use any special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug wash They may cause squeaking chatter noi
386. t properly buckled up The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary airbag injuries without reducing the overall safety of the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained in the vehicle especially in the front seat This provides the protection of safety belts and permits the airbags to provide the additional protection they were designed to provide If you choose to deactivate your airbag you are losing the very significant risk reducing benefits of the airbag and you are also reducing the effectiveness of the safety belts because safety belts in modern vehicles are designed to work as a safety system with the airbags Read all airbag warning labels in the vehicle as well as the other important airbag instructions and warnings in this Owner s Guide NHTSA deactivation criteria excluding Canada 1 Infant An infant less than 1 year old must ride in the front seat because e the vehicle has no rear seat 199 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear facing infant seat or the infant has a medical condition which according to the infant s physician makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that the driver can constantly monitor the child s condition 2 Child age 1 to 12 A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because e the vehicle has no rear seat
387. tact your authorized dealer as soon as possible TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT if equipped Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible CHECK AIR FILTER Diesel engine only Refer to Instrument Cluster in your 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement 147 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls DRAIN WATER SEPARATOR Diesel engine only Displayed when the water separator has reached a predetermined capacity and needs to be drained Refer to your 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement for more information STOP SAFELY NOW Diesel engine only Displays and a chime sounds when the vehicle exhaust system temperature exceeds intended operating range If this warning occurs the engine power is reduced and the engine will shutdown when the vehicle speed is below 3 mph 5 km h Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and contact your authorized dealer Depending on the severity of the over temperature condition the vehicle may or may not restart after cycling the ign
388. tall or 80 lb 86 kg Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat e Can the child sit all the way back against the vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion Can the child sit without slouching Does the lap belt rest low across the hips Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest e Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip 220 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Types of booster seats There are generally two types of belt positioning booster seats backless and high back Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle lap shoulder belt e Backless booster seats gt If your backless booster seat has a removable shield remove the shield If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint a backless booster seat may place your child s head as measured at the tops of the ears above the top of the seat In this os case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap shoulder belts or consider using a high back booster seat High back booster seats If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a high back booster seat would be a better choice 221
389. tarts the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically have the vehicle checked If your vehicle is operated in a heavy snow storm or blowing snow conditions the engine air induction may become partially clogged with snow and or ice If this occurs the engine may experience a significant reduction in power output At the earliest opportunity clear all the snow and or ice away from the air induction inlet The following starting instructions are for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine if your vehicle is equipped with a Diesel engine refer to Starting the engine in your 6 0 and 6 4 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner s Guide Supplement Before starting the vehicle 1 Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts For more information on safety belts and their proper usage refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter 2 Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission 1 Make sure the parking brake is set 2 Make sure the gearshift is in P Park 275 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving If starting a vehicle with a manual transmission 1 Make sure the parking brake is set 2 Push the clutch pedal to the floor e Turn the key to 3 on without turning the key to 4 start Some warning lights will briefly illumina
390. te See Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information regarding the warning lights Starting the engine 1 Turn the key to 3 on without turning the key to 4 start If there is difficulty in turning the key rotate the steering wheel until the key turns freely This condition may occur when e the front wheels are turned e a front wheel is against the curb 2 Turn the key to 4 start then release the key as soon as the engine begins cranking Your vehicle has a computer assisted cranking system that assists in starting the engine After releasing the key from the 4 start position the engine may continue cranking for up to 10 seconds or until the vehicle starts Note Cranking may be stopped at any time by turning the key to the off position 276 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driving 3 After idling for a few seconds apply the brake shift into gear and drive Note If the engine does not start on the first try turn the key to the off position wait 10 seconds and try Step 2 again If the engine still fails to start press the accelerator to the floor and try Step 2 again keeping the accelerator on the floor until the engine begins to accelerate above cranking speeds this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel Guarding against exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fum
391. tellite radio channels For more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels visit www sirius com in the United States www sirius canada ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Satellite radio reception factors To receive the satellite signal your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed open view of the sky a requirement of a satellite radio system Like AM FM there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance e Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible 48 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an audio mute Unlike AM FM audible static you will hear an audio mute when there is a satellite radio signal interference Your radio display may display NO SIGNAL to indicate the interference SIRIUS satellite radio service SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription based satel
392. tensioners Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter WARNING Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision Front safety belt height adjustment The front outboard seating positions are equipped with safety belt height adjusters Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder 184 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision To adjust the shoulder belt height push the button and slide the height adjuster up or down Release the button and pull down on the height PY adjuster to make sure it is locked in place Safety belt with cinch tongue Regular cab center seating position and Super Cab Crew Cab rear center seating positions The cinch tongue will slide up and down the belt webbing when the belt is stowed or while putting safety belts on When the lap shoulder safety belt is buckled the cinch tongue will allow the lap portion to be shortened but pinches the webbing to keep the lap portion from getting longer The cinch tongue is designed to slip during a crash
393. the key to off 6 Make another check for leaks 316 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies FUSES AND RELAYS Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working a fuse may have blown Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse Check the appropriate 15 fuses before replacing any electrical components Note Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR Fuse link cartridge Las s 25A Natural Natural _ Orange Green Green Se a e A a Oo l o f T Nwa 317 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies Passenger compartment fuse panel The fuse panel is located in the passenger s footwell Remove the panel cover to access the fuses To remove the fuse panel cover pull the panel toward you When the clips of the panel disengage let the panel fall easily To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel cover WARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses Always replace the cover to the passenger compartment fuse panel before reconnecting the battery
394. the message center The range of zone values are from 1 to 15 and wraps back to 1 6 To exit the zone setting mode and to lock in your change e press and release the SETUP button or e press INFO button to exit or e wait four seconds and the zone will be locked in Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures and high voltage lines For optimum calibration turn off all electrical accessories heater air conditioning wipers etc and make sure all vehicle doors are shut 7 Press the RESET button to start the compass calibration function RESET FOR CALIBRATION 143 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls 8 Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle less than 3 mph 5 km h CIRCLE SLGULY until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO T T CALIBRATE display changes to TO CALIBRATE CALIBRATION COMPLETED It will take up to five circles to complete calibration 9 The compass is now calibrated Note If the RESET button is CALIBRATION pressed or three minutes has COMPLETED expired the display will go back to the INFO menu and will show CAL instead of the compass heading until the compass is calibrated Language 1 Select this function from the SETUP menu for the current LANGUAGE language to be displayed ENGLISH 2 Waiting four seconds or pressing the RESET button cycles the message center through each of the language
395. the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are less than six strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets BASS Press MENU to reach the bass setting Use W lt q SEEK SEEK to adjust TREB Treble Press MENU to reach the treble setting Use A W lt SEEK SEEK P to adjust BAL Balance Press MENU to reach the balance setting Use W lt SEEK SEEK to adjust the audio between the left L and right R speakers 30 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems FADE Press MENU to reach the fade setting Use W lt q SEEK SEEK to adjust the audio between the back B and front F speakers SPEEDVOL Speed sensitive volume if equipped Press MENU to reach the SPEEDVOL setting Radio volume automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Use VW lt SEEK SEEK P to adjust The default setting is off increasing your vehicle speed will not change the volume level Adjust 1 7 Increasing this setting from 1 lowest setting to 7 highest setting allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Recommended level is 1 3 SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting Track Folder mode Available only on MP3 discs in CD mode In Track mode pressing gt SEEK SEEK
396. the three step procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration During mediation a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim If an agreement is not reached during mediation and your claim is eligible you may participate in the arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing You are not bound by the decision but should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision Ford must abide by the accepted decision as well Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB BBB AUTO LINE Application Using the information provided below please call or write to request a program application You will be asked for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership Upon receipt the BBB will review the claim fo
397. the wheel is raised off the ground The following steps apply to F 250 F 350 Single Rear Wheel SRW vehicles only 5 Insert the hooked end of the jack handle into the jack and use the handle to slide the jack under the vehicle 333 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies 6 Position the jack according to the following guides Front 4x2 e Front driver side 4x4 Note Make sure the jack fits onto the flat area on the outboard side of the differential e Front passenger side 4x4 Note View shown from the rear of the vehicle to clearly identify the jack point Place the jack directly under the axle 334 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies e Rear Never use the front or rear differential as a jacking point WARNING To lessen the risk of personal injury do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack The jack is only meant for changing the tire Sa 5 7 Turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground and high enough to install the spare tire 8 Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench 9 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire making sure the valve stem is facing outward for all front wheels and single rear wheel vehicles If replac
398. times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes CAMVAP decisions are fast fair and final as the arbitrator s award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1 800 207 0685 FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan Ford ESP coverage It provides the following e Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you purchase such as reimbursement for rentals coverage for certain maintenance and wear items e Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper to Bumper Warranty expires You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating authorized dealer There are several plans available in various time distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs Ford ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and rental coverage When you buy Ford ESP you receive Peace of Mind protection throughout the United States and Canada provided by a network of more than 4 600 participating authorized dealers 354 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Customer Ass
399. ting oo ee 343 Emergency Flashers 0 315 Emission control system 392 BUM SING creerea 409 cleaning enangni 360 Coolant sereen 378 diesel serranos 9 fail safe cooling 1 0 383 idle speed control 376 refill capacities c ees 405 service points rnern 370 371 starting after a collision 316 Engine Oil sieisen 373 checking and adding 373 CIDSTICK 2 tcocncsvn Martians cise 373 filter specifications 375 403 415 Index recommendations 375 refill capacities ee 405 Event data recording 0 7 Exhaust fumes cccccceeeees 277 F Fail safe cooling 0ccee 383 Family entertainment system 51 Fluid capacities 0 0 405 Fog lamps snee aeei e 89 Four Wheel Drive vehicles 295 MESCHIPUULON sesters 300 driving Off road secere 302 electronic shift sssr 296 300 indicator light 297 lever operated shift 000 297 manual locking hubs 296 preparing to drive your vehicle oe eececeessseeesseeeeesenes 283 Db ie eee ere eee terre ree 384 calculating fuel economy 139 389 CAD noiis reien ana a aai 386 CADACILY i f s2ididsseisedadisawedectechoase 405 choosing the right fuel 387 comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates 392 detergent in fuel miisi 388 filling your vehicle with FUE ssccssacsscaceseribend os 384 386 389 filter
400. ting power Failure to do so may cause serious personal injury or property damage Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service If your battery has a cover shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced For longer trouble free operation keep the top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time This will minimize the discharge of your battery during storage Note Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability WARNING Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore do not allow flames sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation 376 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance
401. to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision WARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Non adjustable head restraints Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard non adjustable head restraints WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and or operate the vehicle until the seatback is placed in its proper position The driver should never adjust the seatback while the vehicle is in motion The non adjustable head restraints consist of a trimmed foam covering over the upper structure of the seatback Properly adjust the seatback to an upright driving riding position so that the head restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of your head 171 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Full bench seat if equipped e Lift the release bar to move the seat forward or backward Ensure that the seat is relatched
402. to idle for at least one minute Turn the A C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles 16 km or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy e If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned em On A If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected 377 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner s S Follow your local authorized Y A standards for disposal Call your t local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries RECYCLE ENGINE COOLANT Checking engine coolant The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50 50 coolant and distilled water which equates to a freeze point of 34 F 836 C Coolant concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester such as the Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester The level of coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level o
403. tomatically adjust darken to minimize glare 110 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls Without microphone With microphone The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the vehicle is placed in R Reverse to ensure a bright clear view when backing up Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror performance Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products Note If equipped with a Reverse Camera System RCS a video image will display in the mirror or the Navigation system if equipped when the vehicle is put in R Reverse As you shift into any other gear from R Reverse the image will remain for a few seconds and then turn off Refer to Reverse Camera System RCS in the Driving chapter EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power side view mirrors if equipped To adjust your mirrors 1 Rotate the control clockwise to adjust the right mirror and rotate the control counterclockwise to adjust the left mirror 2 Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror 3 Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place The spotter mirror below the main glass if equipped must be adjusted manually 111 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver C
404. tool was not provided when delivered has been lost or no longer functions the battery is not replaceable please contact your authorized dealer to obtain a replacement To verify that your TPMS reset tool is working press and release the button on the center of the TPMS tool The red light should illuminate 250 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading and remain on for approximately five 5 seconds If the light does not illuminate the tool needs to be replaced TPMS reset tips e To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle TPMS reset should be performed at least three feet one meter away from another Ford Motor Company vehicle undergoing the TPMS reset procedure at the same time e Do not wait more than two 2 minutes between resetting each tire sensor or the system will timeout and the entire procedure will have to be repeated on all four wheels e A double horn chirp indicates the need to repeat the procedure TPMS reset procedure It is recommended that you read the entire procedure before attempting Note To enter the reset mode Steps 1 6 MUST be completed within 60 seconds 1 Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition 2 Press and release the brake pedal 3 Cycle the ignition from off to on three 8 times ending in the on position DO NOT start the engine eal 251 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23
405. towed in a forward direction Place the transmission in N Neutral Refer to Brake shift interlock in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the gear shift lever into N Neutral e Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph 56 km h e Maximum distance is 50 miles 80 km 349 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealer While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and or equipment so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford Away from home If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer In the United States Mai
406. tra weight e g by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the additional weight of the child is added to the child restraint It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to the vehicle Sometimes a slight lean towards the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt 209 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 9 Attach the tether strap if the child seat is equipped Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter 10 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward There should be no more than one inch 2 5 cm of movement for proper installation 11 Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST to make certain the child restraint is properly installed Installing child safety seats in cinch tongue combination lap and shoulder belt seating positions Regular Cab front center and Super Crew cab rear center positions The belt webbing below the tongue is the lap portion of the combination lap shoulder belt and the
407. trolled 2 Press MEDIA to change the audio source of the active channel A or B The audio source will be shown on the display You may change the active channel by pressing the A or B headphone control button 54 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Note Channel A can access any possible media source AM FM1 FM2 SAT Gf equipped CD DVD AUX Channel B can only access DVD and AUX sources Note Refer to Single play Dual play for more information Using the infrared IR wireless headphones 1 Press the power control on the earpiece to turn the headphones ON 2 Select Channel A or B for each set of wireless headphones by using the A B control on the ear piece 3 Adjust the headphone volume using the rotary dial on the earpiece Using wired headphones not included WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves 1 Connect the wired headphones in to the headphone jacks on either side of the DVD system Each side is labeled A Aor A B Headphones plugged into jack A will listen to Channel A and headphones plugged into jack B will listen to Channel B 2 Adjust the volume levels using the volume controls on the DVD system VOLUME To adjust display brightness
408. tronically folded and telescoped in out with the switches on the door trim panel If the power fold mirrors are out of sync electronically powerfold the mirrors to re sync the motors This will cause a loud click and the mirrors will jerk during re synchronization This is normal 113 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls Telescoping mirrors if equipped The telescoping feature allows the mirror to extend approximately 2 75 inches 70 mm This feature is especially useful to the driver when towing a trailer Mirrors can be manually pulled out or pushed in to the desired telescopic position If equipped with power telescoping mirrors you can simultaneously position both mirrors using the power telescope switch found on the door trim panel e To telescope the mirrors outboard press and hold the left side of the power telescope lt C gt switch until the mirrors reach their desired position When the end of travel is reached it is normal to hear the power telescoping motors running as long as you continue to hold the switch To telescope the mirrors inboard press and hold the right side of the power telescope switch until the mirrors reach their desired position Memory mirrors if equipped This system allows automatic positioning of the outside rearview mirrors For more information on this feature refer to Memory seats power mirrors adjustable pedals i
409. tructions and warnings provided by the vehicle manufacturer A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized is inappropriate for your child s height age or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death 204 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision which may result in serious injury or death WARNING Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision WARNING Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat These objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop which may increase the risk of serious injury WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision WARNING Do not leave children unreliable adults or pets unattended in your vehicle Transporting children Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their age height and weight All children are shaped differently The child height age and weight thresholds provided are rec
410. ts that require special care The high gloss area is similar to that of the vehicle s exterior the low gloss area is designed to help protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection High gloss paint area In order to maintain the finish of the instrument panel and console the high gloss areas should be treated similar to the that of exterior paint or glossy plastic surfaces When cleaning the high gloss areas e Do not use paper towels or newspaper e Do not use silicone or Teflont PTFE based products Dust the high gloss areas with a clean dry cloth or use Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 or ZC 25 or Motorcraft Dusting Cloth Mitts ZC 47 For general cleaning use mild soapy water and a soft damp cloth then dry with a clean dry cloth or Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 For removal of fine scuffs and scratches use Scotch Britet Microfiber Cloth or cheese cloth along with Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A Motorcraft Paint Sealant ZC 45 or Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish ZC 8 A Note Removal of deep scuffs and scratches should be performed by an authorized dealer or an experienced repair facility Low gloss paint area The low gloss area of the instrument panel s upper dash should be cleaned with mild soapy water and a soft damp cloth then dried with a clean dry cloth When cleaning the low gloss areas e Do not use paper towels or newspaper e Do not use silicone or Teflont P
411. type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns WARNING Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflatio
412. ucts ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish In order to maintain their shine e Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A which is available from your authorized dealer Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers e Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers Chemical strength cleaners or cleaning chemicals in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt could wear away the clearcoat finish over time e Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergent e To remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 available from your authorized dealer 359 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Cleaning ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal When washing e Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage e Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components e Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
413. und where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example e Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires light truck or LT type tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it 226 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 112 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristi
414. up lamp bulbs Chassis cabs only if equipped 1 Make sure the headlamps are off 2 Remove the four screws and the lamp lens from lamp assembly 3 Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb 100 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Lights Replacing cargo lamp and high mount brakelamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamps are off 2 Remove the two screws and lamp assembly from vehicle as wiring permits 3 Remove the bulb socket by rotating counterclockwise 4 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket Replacing front clearance and identification lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamps are off 2 Remove the screw and lens from the lamp assembly 3 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket Install the bulb s in reverse order Replacing fog lamp bulbs if equipped 1 Make sure the headlamps are off 7 2 Remove the bulb socket from the f fog lamp by turning N counterclockwise 4 3 Disconnect the electrical connector from the fog lamp bulb Install the new bulb s in reverse order 101 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Lights Replacing license plate lamp bulbs The license plate bulbs are located behind the rear bumper To change the license plate lamp bulbs 1 Reach behind the rear bumper to locate the bulb 2 Twist the bulb socket counterclockwise and carefully pull t
415. us Driver Controls DRIVE TO CLEAN EXHAUST FILTER Diesel engine only Displayed when the engine control module detects the Diesel Particulate Filter DPF is full of particulates and that the vehicle is not being operated in a manner to allow automatic cleaning The vehicle operator will have to drive the vehicle above 30 mph 48 km h for at least 20 minutes to clean the DPF This message will continue to be displayed until an adequate drive cycle is completed This message is NORMAL Note Power Take Off PTO and or Stationary Elevated Idle SEIC must be disabled in order to initiate Diesel Particulate Filter DPF cleaning CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER Diesel engine only Displays continuously when the vehicle has entered the cleaning mode normally or when cleaning the filter after a DRIVE TO CLEAN EXHAUST FILTER message was previously displayed When this message is displayed various engine actions will raise the exhaust temperature in the DPF to clean the exhaust filter After the exhaust filter is cleaned the exhaust temperature will fall back to normal levels This message is NORMAL WARNING When the CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER message appears in the message center do not park near flammable materials vapors and structures until filter cleaning is complete EXHAUST FILTER DRIVE COMPLETE Diesel engine only Displayed when the vehicle has completed the adequate drive cycle to clean the DPF This message is NORMAL WARNING
416. use of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly To operate the heated seats do the following engine must be running Push gf to activate push yy again to deactivate The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated Memory seats power mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped This system allows automatic positioning of the driver seat power mirrors and adjustable pedals to ly two programmable positions The memory seat control is located on the driver door To save memory positions 2 1 Place the key in the ignition to move the features to the drive position 2 Move all the memory features to the desired positions 3 Press and hold one of t
417. ust indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others 11 Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle 240 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 12 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades e Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 112 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 e Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance e Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel 13 Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturers ma
418. uster GAUGES Speedometer Indicates the current vehicle speed Standard instrument cluster Harley Davidson instrument cluster 21 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Instrument Cluster Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates engine coolant temperature At normal operating temperature the needle will be in the normal range between H and XS C If it enters the red section O the engine is overheating Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let the engine cool WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot Odometer Registers the total miles kilometers of the vehicle Refer to Standard message center or Optional message center in the OO mi Driver Controls chapter on how to switch the display from Metric to English Trip odometer Registers the miles kilometers of individual journeys TRIP XXXX If equipped with a one button message center Select Reset press and release the SELECT RESET button on the cluster to toggle between odometer and trip odometer display To reset press and hold for less than two seconds 00 mi If equipped with a three button message center press and release the message center INFO button until TRIP A or TRIP B appears in the display Press the RESET button to reset Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute Drivin
419. ustomers call 1 800 241 3673 Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information call 1 800 665 2006 HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL The hazard flasher is located on the steering column just behind the steering wheel The hazard flashers will operate when the ignition is in any position or if the key is not in the ignition Push in the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash Press the flasher control again to turn them off Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists Note With extended use the flasher may run down your battery 315 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Roadside Emergencies FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SWITCH This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt After an accident if the engine cranks but does not start this switch may have been activated This switch is located on the V passenger s side of the instrument SLY panel Open the front passenger door and remove the small access N The switch has a red button on top _ A To reset the switch 1 Turn the ignition off 2 Check the fuel system for leaks 3 If no leaks are apparent reset the switch by pushing in on the reset button 4 Turn the ignition on 5 Wait a few seconds and return
420. ve press SEEK p to view the additional display text When the lt indicator is active press lt SEEK to view the previous display text 33 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems In satellite radio mode if equipped press and hold to hear a brief sampling of the next channels Press again to stop In CATEGORY MODE press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of the channels in the selected category Press again to stop Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 14 AM FM Press AM FM to select Do AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 15 ON OFF Volume Press VOL PUSH to turn on off Turn VOL PUSH to increase decrease volume VOL PUSH Note If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on 16 CD Press to enter CD MP3 mode If a CD is already loaded into the system CD MP3 play will begin where it ended last 17 amp CD eject Press to eject a CD 18 CD slot Insert a CD label side up in the CD slot 34 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems Premium Audiophile in dash six CD MP3 satellite compatible sound system if equipped CaN O m amp y O om 8 a4 ada aseek TX sem
421. vehicle brake pedal will also illuminate both trailer and vehicle brake lamps Procedure for adjusting GAIN The GAIN setting is used to set the TBC for the specific towing condition and should be changed as towing conditions change Changes to towing conditions include trailer load vehicle load road conditions and weather The GAIN should be set to provide the maximum trailer braking assistance while ensuring the trailer wheels do not lock when braking Locked trailer wheels may lead to trailer instability 267 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note This should only be performed in a traffic free environment at speeds of approximately 20 25 mph 30 40 km h 1 Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition functioning normally and properly adjusted See your trailer dealer if necessary 2 Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to the trailer manufacturer s instructions 3 When a trailer with electric brakes is plugged in the TRAILER CONNECTED message will display in the instrument cluster message center 4 Use the GAIN adjustment buttons to increase or decrease the GAIN setting to the desired starting point A GAIN setting of 6 0 is a good starting point for heavier loads 5 In a traffic free environment tow the trailer on a dry level surface at a speed of 20 25 mph 30 40 km h and squeeze the manual control
422. ves WARNING When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the window openings 108 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls Press and pull the window switches to open and close windows e Push down to the first detent all G and hold the switch to open AUTO e Pull up to the first detent and hold the switch to close Rear Window Buffeting When one or both of the rear windows are open the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise this noise can be alleviated by e Lowering a front window approximately two to three inches or e Opening a 38rd Row Power Quarter Glass for vehicles equipped with this option One touch down Allows the driver s window to open fully without holding the control down Push the switch completely down to the second detent and release quickly The window will open fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation Window lock if equipped The window lock feature allows only the driver to operate the power windows To lock out all the window controls except for the driver s press the right side of the control Press the left side to restore the window controls 109 2009 F 250 350 450 550 23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls Power r
423. void possible damage to the interior painted surfaces e Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system If a staining liquid like coffee juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth 2 Wipe the surface with a damp clean white cotton cloth For more thorough cleaning use a mild soap and water solution If the spot cannot be completely cleaned by this method the area may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors 3 If necessary apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes 362 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Cleaning 4 Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not soiled badly use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds 5 Following this wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLE HARLEY DAVIDSON ONLY Your vehicle s instrument panel and console are uniquely painted with both high and low gloss pain
424. volume is controlled with the rotary dial on the right ear piece 59 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Entertainment Systems 8 Fast Forward Next In DVD mode press and hold for a quick advance within the DVD Press and release to advance to the next chapter In CD MP3 mode press to access the next track 9 Play Pause Press to play or pause a DVD 10 SHUFFLE Press to play all tracks on the current CD MP3 disc in random order 11 STOP Press to stop the current DVD or CD MP3 12 q ify Speaker Headphone Single Dual Play Press to toggle between Single Play same media playing through all speakers and Dual Play headphone mode the rear speakers are muted You can also press the 2 and 4 memory presets on the audio system at the same time to perform the same function 13 Numeric Keypad Use the numeric controls to enter in a specific CD MP3 track or DVD chapter to be played 14 C Cancel Press to cancel clear the numeric input i e chapter number 15 MEDIA Press to cycle through the possible media sources AM FM1 FM2 SAT if equipped CD DVD LINE IN Gf equipped DVD AUX Channel B can only access DVD and AUX sources 16 VIDEO Press to cycle through video states DVD DISC DVD AUX NON DVD Off 17 EJECT Press to eject a disc from the FES 18 Fast reverse Previous When a DVD is playing press and hold for a quick reverse within the DVD Press and release
425. wer gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling If you do stall out do not try to turn around because you might roll over It is better to back down to a safe location Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill Too much power will cause the tires to slip spin or lose traction resulting in loss of vehicle control Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating Do not descend in neutral instead manually shift to a lower gear Your vehicle has anti lock brakes apply the brakes steadily Do not pump the brakes Driving on snow and ice 4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop Avoid sudden braking as well Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice it won t stop any faster because as in other vehicles braking occurs at all four wheels Do not become overconfident as to road conditions 308 2009 F 250 35
426. wners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts All statistics based on U S data Reasons given Consider Crashes are rare events 36700 crashes occur every day The more we drive the more we are exposed to rare events even for good drivers 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime Tm not going far 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles 40 km of home Belts are uncomfortable We design our safety belts to enhance comfort If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible this can improve comfort T was in a hurry Prime time for an accident Belt Minder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up Safety belts don t work Safety belts when used properly reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 45 in cars and by 60 in light trucks Traffic is light Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single vehicle crashes many when no other vehicles are around Belts wrinkle my clothes Possibly but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes particularly if you are unbelted The people I m with don t Set the example teen deaths occur 4 wear belts times more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people Children and younger brothers sisters
427. xamples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity e Another example for your vehicle with 1 400 lb 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry you 4 of your friends and all the golf bags You and four friends average 220 lb 99 kg each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 lb 13 5 kg each The calculation would be 1400 5 x 220 5 x 30 1400 1100 150 150 lb Yes you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 5 x 99 kg 5 x 13 5 kg 635 495 67 5 72 5 kg 260 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e A final example for your vehicle with 1 400 lb 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for 12 100 lb 45 kg bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 Ib 99 kg the calculation would be 1400 2 x 220 12 x 100 1400 440 1200 240 lb No you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight In metric units the calculation
428. ximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional markings notes or warnings such as standard load radial tubeless etc 241 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for LT type tires LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below Note Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 LT Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for service on light trucks 2 Load Range Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation limits 3 Maximum Load Dual Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a total of six or more tires on the vehicle 4 Maximum Load Single lb kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maxi
429. y Displayed in extremely cold weather typically around 15 F 26 C The accelerator pedal will not respond to pressing this is done so the engine oil can be properly circulated to avoid engine damage from lack of lubrication A timer will begin a countdown from 30 seconds then OK TO DRIVE will display once the counter has reached 0 zero and the accelerator pedal will respond to pressing OK TO DRIVE Diesel engine only Displayed when the time counter has reached 0 zero and the engine is sufficiently warm enough to drive in extremely cold weather refer to the ENGINE WARMING description mentioned previously 135 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Driver Controls DRIVE TO CLEAN EXHAUST FILTER Diesel engine only Displayed when the engine control module detects the Diesel Particulate Filter DPF is full of particulates and that the vehicle is not being operated in a manner to allow automatic cleaning The vehicle operator has to drive the vehicle above 30 mph 48 km h for at least 20 minutes to clean the DPF This will continue to be displayed until an adequate drive cycle is completed This message is NORMAL Note Power Take Off PTO and or Stationary Elevated Idle SEIC must be disabled in order to initiate Diesel Particulate Filter DPF cleaning CLEANING EXHAUST FILTER Diesel engine only Displays continuously when the vehicle has entered the cleaning mode normally o
430. y Vehicles are qualified for use as a stationary power source within limits detailed in the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book found at www fleet ford com truckbbas and through the Ford Truck Body Builders Advisory Service Gas engine vehicles are qualified for up to 10 minutes of continuous operation as a stationary power source due to the potential for the normal venting of fuel vapors For stationary PTO operation of extended duration beyond 10 minutes diesel engine is recommended Further consult your aftermarket PTO installer since the duration of operation limit for the aftermarket PTO may be less than the vehicle is capable of DRIVING THROUGH WATER If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable proceed very slowly especially when the depth is not known Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom SZ of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks When driving through water traction or brake capability may be limited Also water may enter your engine s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage Once through the water always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes 310 2009 F 250
431. y from the coded key and restart the engine Note Do not leave a duplicate coded Key in the vehicle Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle 167 2009 F 250 350 450 550 f23 Owners Guide 2nd Printing USA fus Locks and Security Anti theft indicator The anti theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster Vehicles equipped with the A SecuriLock Passive Anti theft system behave as follows x e When the ignition is in the off position the indicator will flash once every two seconds for a total of 10 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning as a theft deterrent e When the ignition is in the on position the indicator will glow for three seconds to indicate a programmed key has been validated and the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft system has enabled the engine Vehicles without the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft system behave as follows e When the ignition is in the off position the indicator will not flash e When the ignition is in the on position the indicator will glow for three seconds to indicate the engine is enabled Automatic arming The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the off position The theft indicator will flash every A two seconds to act as a theft deterrent when the vehicle is R armed Automatic disarming Switching the ignition to the on position with a coded key disarms the vehicle

Ford 2008 Taurus Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents